Bt Rr 2b6g5j

Master Service Manual (MSM) Product family RR

© BT Industries AB

Part number: 146575-040 Issued: 1998-01-28 SSD

F-code

Section

C-code

RT Introduction to BT’s Service Manual IIssued by

Approved by

Parts

K Hallman

Version no

T-code

001

Introduction to BT’s Service Manual This Service manual contains product information regarding the current trucks including the technical data and instructions for maintenance and service. It includes the operator’s Instruction Manual, Spare Part Handbook and oil and grease specifications: M

Machine information

P

Preventive maintenance

S

Service instructions

O

Options

At the top of each page you can find information on which section the page belongs: Section M 5.0 means that it is Product improvements; F-code means it deals with this specific truck family; T-code means specific products; Date and Version number give information on when the page was issued and which version. It is our ambition to send modification notifications concerning improvements to you as soon as possible. It’s stated on the notifications which section/s in the binder should be replaced; note that the entire section should be replaced! Notifications should be inserted immediately so that the binder always contains current service information. When ing BT’s technical always have the actual Service Manual close at hand. If you have any views regarding the Service Manual, please your training officer at BT who will forward your views to the technical documentation department. This document can be available on different media and will have different part numbers. Please see the following example: 123456-040=An English document on paper 123456-04F=The same document but on fiche

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1994-12-02

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT 76876 Introduction to BT’s Service Manual Version no

T-code

001

2 (2)

Service Manual

1994-12-02

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT Contents Master Service Manual (MSM) IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

Jessica Forsgard

001

268, 301-307, 400-414

Contents Master Service Manual (MSM) Part number:

146575-040 Revised edition 1998-01-28

Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

268

RR 1.0

265200AA-

301

RR N1-N3, N1C-N3C/14

265200AA-

302

RR B1-B3, B1C-B3C/14

265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305

RR E1-E3, E1C-E3C/14

265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT Contents Master Service Manual (MSM) Version no

001

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

1 Document list Section C-code T-kod

M

Document

Issued

Introduction

1996-05-09

Contents M

1994-11-28

M1

268, 301-307, 400-414

Operators manual

1999-05-20

M2

301-307, 400

General product information (vers.1)

1997-09-22

401-414

General product information (vers. 2)

1997-10-02

301-307, 400

Technical service data (vers. 1)

1997-09-22

401-414

Technical service data (vers. 2)

1997-10-02

M6

Ordering Spare Parts

1994-11-28

M7

Quality Parts

1999-05-20

M8

Recommended Spare Parts

1999-05-20

P

Contents P

1994-11-28

P1

Introduction, maintenance

1997-10-02

301-307, 400

Service schedule

1997-10-10

401-414

Service schedule

1997-10-02

301-307, 400

Oil and grease specification

1997-10-10

401-414


1997-10-02

401-414

Tools

1997-12-16

Contents S

1994-01-21

M4

P2

P3

P4 S S0

0510

305-307, 400

Cab attachment

1997-01-21

0840

301-307, 400-414 Driver protection

1997-10-22

S1

1700

401-414

Drive motor

1997-10-14

S2

2550.1

301-307, 400

Transmission, gear

1997-02-21

2550.2

401-414

Transmission, gear

1997-10-28

3000

301-307, 400

Brakes

1997-04-14

3100.1

401-406, 409-412 Brake system, without arm brakes

1997-10-01

3100.2

401-414

1997-10-01

S3

2 (4)

Brake system, with arm brakes Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

Section C-code T-kod

268, 301-307, 400-414

Document

Issued

3120

301-307, 400

Main cylinder

1997-05-13

3140

301-307, 400

Distributing valve

1996-11-13

3160

301-307, 400

Drum brake, disc brake

1996-11-13

3530.1

301-307, 400

Drive wheel

1997-05-13

3530.2

301-307, 401-414 Drive wheel

1997-10-01

3550

301-307, 401-414 arm wheel

1997-10-01

S4

4100

301-307, 401-414 Steering system

1997-10-29

S5

5000

301-307, 400

Electrical system

1997-01-21

5000

401-414

Electrical system

1999-05-20

5460

301-307, 400

Transistor regulator

1997-02-06

5710

301-307, 400

Electronic card/control card

1997-01-23

5710

401-414

Electronic card/control card

1999-05-20

5810

401-414

Pump motor

1997-10-16

5830

301-307, 400-414 Steering motor

1997-04-01

6000

301-307, 400

Hydraulics

1996-09-26

6140

301-307, 400

Hydraulic pump

1996-11-13

6140

401-414

Hydraulic pump

1998-03-23

6270

301-307, 401-414 Hose reel

1998-04-02

7000

301-307, 401-414 Mast/cylinders

1997-04-06

7100

301-306

Mast

1997-10-09

7190

301-307, 400

Mast fixation points

1997-05-26

7310.1

301-307, 400

Lift cylinder

1997-03-17

7310.2

301-306, 400

Lift cylinder

1997-03-17

7320

301-307, 401-414 Tilt cylinder

1998-03-23

7330

301-307, 401-414 Reach cylinder

1998-03-23

7340

301-307, 401-414 Free lift cylinder

1998-03-23

9390

301-307, 400-414 Position sensors

1997-02-17

S6

S7

S9

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

4 (4)

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M Contents, M

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

Parts

H Forsman

001

T-code

Contents, M 1. Truck information

© BT Products AB

M 1.0

Operators Manual

M 2.0

Product information

M 3.0

Product sheet

M 4.0

Technical service data

M 5.0

Product improvements

M 6.0

Spare Part ordering

M 7.0

Spare Part Handbook

M 8.0

Recommended Spare Parts

Service Manual

97-09-22

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M Contents, M Version no

001

2 (2)

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

97-09-22

English

F-code

Section

RT

M1 Operator’s manual

C-code

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

Jessica Forsgard

001

268, 301-307, 400-414

Operator’s manual Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model/Serial

Machine N°

268

RR 1.0/

257696AA–

301


265200AA–326472AA

302


265200AA–326472AA

303


265200AA–326472AA

304


265200AA–326472AA

305


265200AA–326472AA

306


265200AA–326472AA

307


265200AA–326472AA

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA–

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

Note

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M1 Operator’s manual Version no

001

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

1 General An Operator´s Manual is supplied with every truck. If, for any reason, the customer does not obtain an Operator´s Manual, they can be ordered from BT. In the table below, you can see which Operator´s Manuals are available for this machine series.

1.1 Issued operator’s manuals T-code

Model

Serial number

Order Date of number issue

268

RR 1.0

277525AA–

148603

1996-01-10

301–307

RR B/E1-8, N1-3(C) AC/ACi 262063AA–277458AA 143713

1994-12-01

301–307


1995-10-30

301–307


1996-08-28

301-307


1998-03-02

400

RR E2C-E8C

277459AA–307243AA 150255

1995-11-29

400

RR E2C-E8C

277459AA–307243AA 155488

1996-08-28

400

RR E2C-E8C AC/ACi

301518AA–

158713

1997-11-14

400

RR E2C-E8C AC/ACi

301518AA–

164180

1998-03-02

401–414

RR B/E1-8, N1-3(C) AC/ACi 301518AA–

158712

1997-07-07

401–414

RR B/E1-8, N1-3(C) AC/ACi 301518AA–

164181

1998-02-27

In this Master Service Manual can be found a typical Operator´s Manual for the machine series. We have chosen this for your own safety when working with the truck.

2 (4)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M1 Operator’s manual

Version no

T-code

001

268, 301-307, 400-414

2 Year of introduction

© BT Industries AB

Truck type

Machine number

Serial number

Year of introduction

RTS

750–1099

5

1965

RTS 1350

143267–

8

1983/84

RR N1-N3(1

265202–

14

1995

RR N1-N3(1

391518–

15

1997

RT 12

750–1099

5

1965

RT 1250

1100–1649

6

1971

RT 1350

1650–84531

7

1974

RT 1350

84532–97572

8

1976

RT 1350

97573–116392

9

1978

RT 1350

116393–137246

10

1980

RT 1350 E

137247–155799

11

1983

RT 1350 E

155800–226099

12

1985

RT 1350 E

226100–229367

13

1991

RT 1350 E, SEC

229368–265201

13

1991

RT 1600

101–93852

1

1972

RT 1600

93853–116392

2

1978

RT 1600

116393–137461

3

1980

RT 1600 E

137462–155799

4

1983

RT 1600

155800–226099

5

1985

RT 1600 SE

226100–229367

13

1991

RT 1600 SE, SEC

229368–265201

13

1991

RR B1-B8, E1-E8(1

265202–326472

14

1995–1998

RR B1-B8, E1-E8(1

301518–

15

1997

RT 1800 E

144866–155799

1

1984

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M1 Operator’s manual Version no

001

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

Truck type

Machine number

Serial number

Year of introduction

RT 1800 E

155800–226099

2

1985

RT 1800 SE

226100–265201

13

1991

RT 2000

101–93852

1

1972

RT 2000

93853–118243

2

1978

RT 2000

118244–137471

3

1980

RT 2000

137472–155472

4

1983

RT 2000 E

155800–226099

5

1985

RT 2000 SE

226100–229367

13

1991

RT 2000 SE, SEC

229368–265201

13

1991

RR B1-B8, E1-E8(1

265202–326472

14

1995–1998

RR B1-B8, E1-E8(1

301518–

15

1997

RT 2500 E

165332–226099

1

1988

RT 2500 SE

226100–265201

13

1991

RR B1-B8, E1-E8(1

265202–326472

14

1995–1998

RR B7-B8, E7-E8(1

301518–

15

1997

RR 1.0

257696–

1994

DC/AC machines were made during the same period of time.

4 (4)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M2 General product information IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

301-307,400

General product information Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. Presentation of BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach truck program is intended for handling pallets indoors or alternatively other types of loads using other load carriers. The trucks are operated with the driver seated in a protected and ergonomic operator position. They are available in different size classes and have as standard a lifting capacity of up to 2500 kg and a lifting height of up to 10.8 m. The trucks are equipped with a 48 V electrical system. The travel and lifting speeds are transistor controlled to provide smooth operation. In addition, the travel function and the different hydraulic functions have additional controls which further enhance these features. Different speeds, steering and cab tilt (optional) can be set using parameters to give the best possible individual setting for the functions

1.1. Application areas for BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach trucks are solely designed and manufactured to handle goods. The trucks should be fitted with the appropriate accessories relevant to the application.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M2 General product information Version no

001

T-code

301-307,400

1.2. Prohibited applications for BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach trucks are designed for handling goods indoors. It is not permitted to use the trucks for other purposes including the following: - In areas that contain gases which can cause fires or explosions - As a towing truck for trailers - To tow other trucks - To transport/lift engers - To drive on gravel or grass

2. Truck data The table provides information regarding some technical data, which is of value with daily use of the truck.

Truck type

RR B1-3

Operating speed without load, m/s

3.0

Operating speed with classified load, m/s

2.8

Max. operating gradient with load,%

10

Continuous noise level, dB A Vibration level, m/s2 The truck’s lifting capacity, lifting height and weight can be found on the truck’s type plate.

2 (6)

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Truck dimensions The diagram shows the external dimensions of the truck. +4

-2

b14

h2

h2

h1

271

e

h1

h3

b5

h3

h4

h4

b4

h6

15

l7

l2

1270

55

282

x

m1

b1

h8 h13

Wa

l

y

215

Dimensions

RR B1-3

RR E1-3

RR B4-6/E4-6 RR B7-8/E7-8

b1 Chassis width

1270/1470

1270/1470

1270/1470

1270/1470

h6 Height above protective roof

2166

2216

2266

2266

I1 Truck length excl, forks

1812

1812

1887

2012

Wa Turning radius

1640

1640

1685

1806

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

4. Identification plate, truck The diagram shows the type plate for RR B1-B8, E1-E8, N1-N3.

Item

Text

Unit

A

MODEL

B

NO

C

RATED CAPACITY

kg

D

WEIGHT WITHOUT BATTERY

kg

E

BATTERY WEIGHT

F

BATTERY VOLTAGE

MAX MIN

kg V

5. Capacity plate The diagram shows the capacity plate used on the truck.

4 (6)

Tecken

Text

H

NO

I

LIFT HEIGHT

mm

J

ACTUAL CAPACITY

kg

K

LOAD CENTRE

mm

L

THE TRUCK MUST ALWAYS BE DRIVEN WITH LOWERED FORKS AND RETRACTED MAST EXCEPT WHEN PLACING OR REMOVING LOAD

Service Manual

Unit

1997-09-22

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

6. Modification plate The picture shows the modification plate which is found on the truck if it is supplied as non-standard or if it has been modified after leaving the manufacturer. The plate includes information according to the table below.

Item

Text

A

Modification plate

B

Type

C

Serial number

D

Place of manufacture

E


F

Modification number

G

Date

7. Identification plate, mast The picture shows the mast number plate located on the side of the mast. The plate includes information according to the table below.

© BT Products AB

Item

Text

A

Type

B

Serial number

C

Date

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

6 (6)

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M2 General product information IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

002

401-414

General product information Valid from machine number:

T-code Model

Machine number

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. Presentation of BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach truck program is intended for handling pallets indoors or alternatively other types of loads using other load carriers. The trucks are operated with the driver seated in a protected and ergonomic operator position. BT’s reach trucks are available in different size classes and have as standard a lifting capacity of up to 2500 kg and a lifting height of up to 10.8 m. The trucks are equipped with a 48 V electrical system. The travel and lifting speeds are transistor controlled to provide smooth operations. In addition, the travel function and the different hydraulic functions have additional controls which further enhance these features. Different speeds, steering and cab tilt (optional) can be set using parameters to give the best possible individual setting for the functions.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

1 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

1.1. Application areas for BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach trucks are solely designed and manufactured to handle goods. The trucks should be fitted with the appropriate accessories relevant to the application.

1.2. Prohibited applications for BT’s reach trucks BT’s reach trucks are designed for handling goods indoors. Unless the truck is specially equipped, it is not permitted to use the truck for other purposes including the following applications: - In areas that contain gases or dust which can cause fires or explosions -

As a tow-truck for trailers To tow other trucks To transport/lift engers To drive on gravel or grass

2. Truck data The table provides information regarding some technical data, which is of value with daily use of the truck.

2 (8)

Truck type

B1-B3 E1-E3

B5-B6 B7-B8 N1 E5-E6 E7-E8

N2-N3

Lifting capacity rated load, kg

1600

2000

2500

1600

1600

Operating speed without load, without arm brake m/s

3.1

2.9

-

3.1

3.1

Operating speed with rated load, without arm brake m/s

2.8

2.7

-

2.8

2.8

Operating speed without load, with arm brake m/s

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

Operating speed with rated load, with arm brake m/s

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

3.3

Max. operating gradient with rated load, %

10

10

7

10

10

Rate of lifting, without load, m/s

0.5

0.48

0.5

0.5

0.5

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

Truck type

B1-B3 E1-E3

B5-B6 B7-B8 N1 E5-E6 E7-E8

N2-N3

Rate of lifting, with rated load, m/s

0.33

0.30

0.27

0.33

0.33

Rate of lowering, without load, m/s

0.46

0.46

0.44

0.46

0.46

Rate of lowering, with rated load, m/s 0.50

0.49

0.47

0.50

0.50

Weight without battery, kg

2315 1

2995 2

3885 3

2215 1

2215 1

Battery (5h discharge)

360/ 480

480/ 600

600/ 800

292/ 360/ 480

292/ 360/ 480

Weight of battery (min.), kg

700/ 865

865/ 1075

1075/ 1270

510/ 610/ 780

510/ 610/ 780

Continuous noise level, dB (A)

< 70

< 70

< 70

< 70

< 70

Vibration level m/s2

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

1) h3 = 5700 mm 2)

h3 = 7000 mm

3)

h3 = 9000 mm

The truck’s lifting capacity, lift height and weight can be found on the truck’s type plate.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

3. Truck dimensions The diagrams show external dimensions for RR B1-8, E1-E8, N1-N3. +4

-2

b14

h2

h2

h1

271

e

h1

h3

b5

h3

h4

h4

b4

h6

15

l7

l2

1270

55

282

x

m1

b1

h8 h13

Wa

l

y

215

Dimensions (mm)

B1-B3 E1-E3 B5-B6/ E5-E6

B7-B8/ N1 E7-E8

N2

N3

b1 Chassis width

1270/ 1470/ 1670

1270/ 1470/ 1670

1270/ 1470/ 1670

1270/ 1470/ 1670

1100

1100

1100

b4 Width between arms

900/ 1100/ 1300

900/ 1100/ 1300

900/ 1100/ 1300

900/ 1100/ 1300

730

730

730

b5 Width across forks

250775

250775

270-795

275-800

250720

250720

250720

e Fork width

100

100

120

125

100

100

100

h1 Mast height, min.

20123708

20123708

20123708

22714271

20122445

27073039

32063539

h2 Free lift

15063140

15063140

15063140

16913691

15061939

21412473

24602973

4 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

Dimensions (mm)

B1-B3 E1-E3 B5-B6/ B7-B8/ N1 E5-E6 E7-E8

N2

N3

h3 Lift height

44009000

44009000

44009000

480010800

44005700

63007000

75008500

h4 Mast height, max

49059565

49059565

49059565

538111381

49056205

68657565

30659065

h6 Height over cab

2166

2216

2266

2266

2166

2166

2166

l Fork length

1150

1150

1150

1150

1150

1150

1150

I7 Truck length excl. forks

1812

1812

1887

2012

1812

1812

1812

m1Floor clearance

70

70

70

70

70

70

70

Wa Turning radius

1640

1640

1685

1806

1640

1640

1640

4. Identification plate, truck The diagram shows the type plate used on RR B1-B8, E1-E8, N1-N3.

© BT Products AB

Item

Text

A

MODEL

B

NO

C

RATED CAPACITY

kg

D

WEIGHT WITHOUT BATTERY

kg

E

BATTERY WEIGHT

kg kg

F

BATTERY VOLTAGE

Service Manual

Unit

1997-10-02

MAX MIN

V

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

5. Capacity plate The illustration shows the capacity plate used on the truck.

Item

Text

Unit

H

NO

I

LIFT HEIGHT

mm

J

ACTUAL CAPACITY

kg

K

LOAD CENTRE

mm

L

THE TRUCK MUST ALWAYS BE DRIVEN WITH LOWERED FORKS AND RETRACTED MAST EXCEPT WHEN PLACING OR REMOVING LOAD.

6. Modification plate The picture shows the modification plate which is found on the truck if it is supplied as non-standard or if it has been modified after leaving the manufacturer. The plate includes information according to the table below.

6 (8)

Item

Text

A

Modification plate

B

Type

C

Serial number

D


E


F

Modification number

G

Date

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

7. Identification plate, mast The illustration shows the mast identification plate which can be found on the side of the mast. The plate shows information according to the table below.

© BT Products AB

Item

Text

A

Type

B

Serial number

C

Date

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

8 (8)

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

M4 Technical service data

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

301-307,400

Technical service data Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B4 - B6 RR E4 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

Type

D41

D51

D51

Power

5 kw

6,5 kw

6,5 kw

Intermittence

60%

60%

60%

Min. carbon brush length

14 mm

14 mm

14 mm

Min. commutator diameter

73 mm

73 mm

73 mm

Drive motor

Transmission/gear Type

2-step angle gear

Gear ratio

16.13:1

17.57:1

17.57:1

Oil volume

2.5 litres

3.75 litres

3.75 litres

Oil type at normal temperature at temperatures < -15° C:

Hypoid oil SAE 80W90 SAE 75W



© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M4 Technical service data Version no

001

T-code

301-307,400

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B4 - B6 RR E4 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

diameter 310x110

diameter 310x110

diameter 350x130

90 Nm

90 Nm

90 Nm

diameter 265x108 diameter 300x100

diameter 350x108

diameter 350x108

Type

PM 1

PM 1

PM 8

Power

10 kW

10 kW

14 kW

Intermittence

15 %

15 %

15 %


14 mm

14 mm

14 mm


73 mm

73 mm

73 mm

Pump flow

19 cm2

19 cm2

22 cm2

Tank volume

30/38 litres

38 litres

38 litres

Oil type: at normal temperature at temperature <-15°

ISO-L-HM32 ISO-L-HV32



Power

240 W

240 W

240 W

Intermittence

Continually


9 mm

9 mm

9 mm


22,9 mm

22,9 mm

22,9 mm

Wheels Drive wheel Wheel pressure without load Wheel pressure with classified load Wheel bolts’ tightening torque arm wheels Axle pressure with classified load Hydraulic system

Pressure with rated load Overflow pressure

Steering motor

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M4 Technical service data

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B4 - B6 RR E4 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

Control circuits

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

Steering motor

30 A/122308-300

30 A/122308-300

30 A/122308-300

Drive motor

160 A/29223

160 A/29223

160 A/29223

Pump motor

200 A/29673

200 A/29673

300 A/29674

Fuses

Battery Dimensions WxLxH Capacity Weight Driving speed Without load With 1000 kg load With classified load Lifting/lowering speed Lifting without load Lifting with 1000 kg Lifting with classified load Lowering without load Lowering with 1000 kg load Lowering with classified load Power consumption Driving without load Driving with 1000 kg load Driving with classified load

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M4 Technical service data Version no

001

T-code

301-307,400

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B4 - B6 RR E4 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

Type of fluid

DOT 3-4

DOT 3-4

DOT 3-4

Amount of fluid (truck without arm brakes)

0,4 litres

0,4 litres

0,4 litres

Amount of fluid (truck with arm brakes)

0,8 litres

0,8 litres

0,8 litres

Free lift Lifting without load Lifting with 1000 kg load Lifting with rated load Main lift Lifting without load Lifting with 1000 kg load Lifting with classified load Tilting without load Tilting with 1000 kg load Tilting with classified load Mast in/out without load Mast in/out with 1000 kg load Mast in/out with classified load Side shift without load Side shift with 1000 kg load Side shift with classified load Travel brake

4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-09-22

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

M4 Technical Service Data

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

002

401-414

Technical Service Data Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Machine N°

Note

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RRE5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B5 - B6 RR E5 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

Drive motor Type

TSP 112/4-165-t

Power

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

7.5 kW

Intermittence

60%

60%

60%

Insulation class

F

F

F

Transmission/gear Type

2-step angle gear

Gear ratio

19.2:1

20.89:1

20.89:1

Oil volume

2.8 litres

3.3 litres

3.3 litres

Oil type

Hypoid oil

Hypoid oil

Hypoid oil

At normal temperature

SAE 80W90

SAE 80W90

SAE 80W90

SAE 75W

SAE 75W

SAE 75W

<

-15°

C:

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M4 Technical Service Data Version no

002

T-code

401-414

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B5 - B6 RR E5 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

diameter 310x120

diameter 310x120

diameter 350x130

Wheel bolts’ tightening torque

130

130

130

arm wheels

diameter 265x108 diameter 300x100

diameter 350x108

diameter 350x108

Wheels Drive wheel Wheel pressure without load Wheel pressure with rated load

Axle pressure with rated load Hydraulic system Pump motor, Type

TSP 112/4-195-t

Power

10.1 kW

10.0 kW

14.0 kW

Intermittence

15%

15%

15%

Insulation class

F

F

F

Pressure with rated load, bar

150

180

185

Overflow pressure, bar

165

195

200

Pump flow

30 litres/min.

26 litres/min.

35 litres/min.

Tank volume

30/38 litres

38 litres

38 litres

At normal temperature

ISO-L-HM32

ISO-L-HM32

ISO-L-HM32

<-15°

ISO-L-HV32

ISO-L-HV32

ISO-L-HV32

Type

36-4830312J

36-4830312J

36-4830312J

Power

0,20

0,20

0,20

Intermittence

100%

100%

100%


9 mm

9 mm

9 mm


22.9 mm

22.9 mm

22.9 mm

Insulation class

B

B

B

Oil type:

Steering motor

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M4 Technical Service Data

Version no

T-code

002

401-414

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B5 - B6 RR E5 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

F1, Drive motor

125 A/29584

160 A/29223

160 A/29223

F3, Pump motor

200 A/29673

250 A/29221

300 A/29674

F60, Supply voltage A5

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

F61, Steering servo

30 A/122308-300

30 A/122308-300

30 A/122308-300

F62, Input from main or

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

F63, Extra equipment

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

10 A/122308-100

Without load, without arm brake

3.1 m/s

2.9 m/s

---

With rated load, without arm brake

2.8 m/s

2.7 m/s

---

Without load, with arm brake

3.3 m/s

3.3 m/s

3.3 m/s

With rated load, with arm brake

3.3 m/s

3.3 m/s

3.3 m/s

Lifting without load

0.50 m/s

0.48 m/s

0.50 m/s

Lifting with 1000 kg

0.37 m/s

0.35 m/s

0.37 m/s

Lifting with classified load

0.33 m/s

0.30 m/s

0.27 m/s

Lowering without load

0.46 m/s

0.46 m/s

0.44 m/s

Lowering with 1000 kg load

0.53 m/s

0.53 m/s

0.47 m/s

Lowering with classified load

0.50 m/s

0.50 m/s

0.53 m/s

Fuses

Battery Dimensions WxLxH Capacity Weight Driving speed

Lifting/lowering speed

Power consumption, driving Driving without load, A Driving with rated load, A

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M4 Technical Service Data Version no

002

T-code

401-414

RR B1 - B3 RR E1 - E3 RR N1 - N3

RR B5 - B6 RR E5 - E6

RR B7 - B8 RR E7 - E8

Lifting without load, A

120

110

150

Lifting with rated load, A

260

290

345

Power consumption, free lift

Power consumption, main lift Lifting without load, A Lifting with rated load, A Tilting without load Tilting with rated load Mast in/out without load Mast in/out with rated load Side shift, forks, without load Side shift, forks, with rated load NOTE: Data may be missing in the table due to uncompleted tests or insufficient information being available.

4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

RT IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

C-code

M6 Ordering Spare Parts T-code

Ordering Spare Parts • Localise the fault on the truck. • Find out the machine type and machine number. • Find the machine type and machine number in the spare part catalogue’s list of contents. • Look up the page with the exploded diagram and locate the position number for the part you require. • Look up the position number in the table. Select the column with regard to the actual machine type and machine number. • Note the article number. • Call the Truck Centre and state the article number. The Truck Centre will now order the actual article via computer from BT Parts. The article is delivered by DDD during the night and the next day you will have the part. (If you place the order after 4.30 pm the delivery will be delayed.) If you cannot find the machine type, machine number or the article number call the Truck Centre and they will help you.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M6 Ordering Spare Parts Version no

T-code

001

2 (2)

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M7 Quality Parts

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

Jessica Forsgard

001

268, 301-307, 400-414

Quality Parts Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

268

RR 1.0

257696AA–

301


265200AA–326472AA

302


265200AA–326472AA

303


265200AA–326472AA

304


265200AA–326472AA

305


265200AA–326472AA

306


265200AA–326472AA

307


265200AA–326472AA

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA–

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

Notes

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M7 Quality Parts Version no

001

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

1. Issued Quality Parts

2 (4)

Model

Serial No

Order Issued number

RR B/E1-3(C)/15 AC/ACi

316983AA–

165144

1998-04-06


301518AA–

159152

1998-01-29


316983AA–

165145

1998-04-06


301518AA–

159154

1998-01-29

RR N1-3(C)/15 AC/ACi

316983AA–

165143

1998-04-06

RR N1-3(C)/15 AC/ACi

301518AA–

159663

1998-01-29


316983AA–

165042

1998-04-06


301518AA–

158416

1997-12-10

RR N1-3(C)/14

316983AA–

164953

1998-04-06

RR N1-3(C)/14

306401AA–

161846

1997-09-19

RR N1-3(C)/14

301926AA–

157303

1997-06-11

RR N1-3(C)/14

293892AA–

156648

1996-12-13

RR N1-3(C)/14

285734AA–

153096

1996-05-11

RR N1-3(C)/14

277518AA–

150694

1996-02-05

RR N1-3(C)/14

265200AA–

146897

1995-09-22

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

316983AA–

164954

1998-04-06

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

306401AA–

161844

1997-09-19

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

301926AA–

157301

1997-06-11

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

293892AA–

156649

1996-12-13

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

285688AA–

153097

1996-05-11

RR B/E1-3(C)/14

277459AA–

150691

1996-01-03

RR B/E1-3/14

265200AA–

146898

1995-09-13

RR B/E5-6(C)/14

316983AA–

164955

1998-04-06

RR B/E5-6(C)/14

306401AA–

161845

1997-09-19

RR B/E5-6(C)/14

301926AA–

157302

1997-06-11

RR B/E5-6(C)/14

293892AA–

156650

1996-12-13

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

M7 Quality Parts

Version no

T-code

001

© BT Industries AB

268, 301-307, 400-414

Model

Serial No

Order Issued number

RR B/E4-6(C)/14

285726AA–

153098

1996-05-11

RR B/E4-6(C)/14

277506AA–

150692

1996-01-09

RR B/E4-6(C)/14

265200AA–

146899

1995-09-22

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

316983AA–

164956

1998-04-06

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

306401AA–

159585

1997-09-19

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

301926AA–

160213

1997-06-11

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

293892AA–

155522

1996-11-30

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

285732AA–

153099

1996-05-11

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

277512AA–

150693

1995-02-05

RR B/E7-8(C)/14

265200AA–

146900

1995-09-22

RR 1.0

277525AA–

150697

1996-10-01

RR 1.0

257696AA–

142345

1995-03-28

RR E1-8(C), Cold Store Cabin

306401AA–

161131

1998-03-09

RR E1-8(C)/14, Cold Store Cabin

301926AA–

160396

1997-06-25

RR E1-8(C)/14, Cold Store Cabin

265200AA–

156821

1996-11-25

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M7 Quality Parts Version no

001

4 (4)

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M8 Recommended Spare Parts (RSP) IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

Jessica Forsgard

001

268, 301-307, 400-414

Recommended Spare Parts (RSP) Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

268

RR 1.0

257696AA–

301


265200AA–326472AA

302


265200AA–326472AA

303


265200AA–326472AA

304


265200AA–326472AA

305


265200AA–326472AA

306


265200AA–326472AA

307


265200AA–326472AA

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA–

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA–

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA–

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA–

ACi

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

Notes

1 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT M8 Recommended Spare Parts (RSP) Version no

001

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

1. Issued RSP

2 (4)

T-code

Model

Serial No

Issued

268

RR 1.0

257696AA–277524AA

1996-12-04

268

RR 1.0

277525AA–

1996-12-04

301

RR N1-N3(C)/14

265200AA–290082AA

1997-07-10

301

RR N1-N3(C)/14

290083AA–301925AA

1997-07-08

301

RR N1-N3(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

301

RR N1-N3(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

302

RR B1-B3(C)/14

265200AA–290082AA

1997-07-10

302

RR B1-B3(C)/14

290083AA–301925AA

1997-07-10

302

RR B1-B3(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

302

RR B1-B3(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

303

RR B4-B6(C)/14

265200AA–290082AA

1997-07-10

303

RR B5-B6(C)/14

290083AA–301925AA

1997-07-10

303

RR B5-B6(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

303

RR B5-B6(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

304

RR B7-B8(C)/14

265200AA–286270AA

1997-07-10

304

RR B7-B8(C)/14

286271AA–301925AA

1997-07-10

304

RR B7-B8(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

304

RR B7-B8(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

305

RR E1-E3(C)/14

265200AA–290082AA

1997-10-15

305

RR E1-E3(C)/14

290083AA–301925AA

1997-10-15

305

RR E1-E3(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

305

RR E1-E3(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

306

RR E4-E6(C)/14

265200AA–290082AA

1997-10-15

306

RR E5-E6(C)/14

290083AA–301925AA

1997-10-15

306

RR E5-E6(C)/14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

306

RR E5-E6(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

307

RR E7-E8(C)/14

265200AA–286270AA

1997-10-15

307

RR E7-E8(C)/14

286271AA–301925AA

1997-10-15

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

© BT Industries AB

268, 301-307, 400-414

T-code

Model

Serial No

Issued

307

RR E7-E8(C)14

301926AA–306400AA

1997-10-15

307

RR E7-E8(C)/14

306401AA–

1997-10-15

401

RR N1-N3(C) AC/ACi

301518AA–

1998-04-24

403

RR B1-B3(C) AC/ACi

301518AA–

1998-04-22

405

RR B5-B6(C) AC/ACi

301518AA–

1998-04-26

407

RR B7-B8(C)/15 AC/ACi 301518AA–

1997-12-08

409

RR E1-E3(C)/15 AC/ACi 301518AA–

1998-04-22

411

RR E5-E6(C)/15 AC/ACi 301518AA–

1998-04-26

413

RR E7-E8(C)/15 AC/ACi 301518AA–

1997-12-08

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

4 (4)

T-code

268, 301-307, 400-414

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

P Content, P

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

T-code

Content, P 1. Preventive Maintenance

© BT Products AB

P1

Introduction

P2

Maintenance chart, Lubrication chart

P3


P4

Tools

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

1 (2)

F-code

RT Content, P Version no

Section

C-code

P T-code

001

2 (2)

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

P1 Introduction, maintenance

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

301-412

Introduction, maintenance All points in the service program should be carried out to attain the highest safety and the least possible downtime. The service intervals are only a guide and do not need to be followed to the letter. The operator may adapt them to local conditions, but it is important that the intervals comply with BT’s minimum requirements. The service intervals are based on the running times and can be adapted to most normal 8 hour shifts. The service interval may be shortened if the truck is used more frequently or in more demanding situations, e.g cold store, dusty or corrosive situations. The following running times have been used when calculating the intervals: - Day time: 08.00-17.00 (20 hr./week) - 2-shifts: 06.00-14.00, 14.00-22.00 (40 hr./week) - 3-shifts: 06.00-14.00, 14.00-22.00,22.00-06.00 (60 hr./week) Ensure the truck is given a regular maintenance service after every 500 driving hours. The truck’s safety, efficiency and service life is dependent on the service and maintenance it is given. Only use BT approved spare parts when service and repair work are carried out.

1. Safety regulations with maintenance work Only personnel that have been trained in the service and repair of this type of truck are authorised to carry out service and repair work. • Do not carry out any maintenance work on the truck unless you have the correct training and knowledge to do so • Keep the area where you carry out the service clean. Oil or water makes the floor slippery • Never wear loose objects or jewellery when working on the truck WARNING! Short-circuiting/Burns. When working with the truck’s electrical system, shortcircuiting/burns can occur if a metal object comes into with live electrical connections. Remove watches, rings or other types of metal jewellery. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT P1 Introduction, maintenance Version no

001

T-code

301-412

• Always disconnect the battery by pulling out the battery isolator when carrying out maintenance work on the truck unless otherwise stated in this Service Manual • Always switch off the truck’s power supply before opening the covers on the drive unit or electrical system • Relieve the system pressure slowly before starting work on the truck’s hydraulic system • Use paper or a rigid sheet of cardboard when checking for oil leakage. Never use your hand • Bear in mind that the oil in the transmission or the hydraulic system can be hot WARNING! Risk of burns. Hot transmission and hydraulic oil. Let the truck cool before changing the oil.

• Only fill the hydraulic system with new and clean oil WARNING! The hydraulic system can be damaged. If the oil is contaminated hydraulic components can be damaged. Always use new and clean oil in the hydraulic system.

• Store and dispose of changed oil in accordance with local directives • Do not release solvents and the like, which are used for cleaning/washing, into drains that are not intended for this purpose. Follow the local directives that apply for disposal • Disconnect the battery when welding on the truck NOTE! The battery can be damaged. When welding using an electric power source the welding current can enter the battery. The battery should therefore be disconnected.

• Remove at least 100 mm of paint around the welding/ grinding area through sand-blasting or the use of a paint stripper when welding or grinding on painted surfaces CAUTION! Harmful gases. Paint that is heated gives off harmful gases. Remove 100 mm of paint from the work area.

2 (6)

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-412

2. Cleaning and washing Cleaning and washing of the truck is important to ensure the truck’s reliability. • Carry out general cleaning and washing weekly NOTE! Risk of short-circuiting. The electrical system can be damaged Disconnect the battery before washing by pulling out the battery connector.

2.1. External cleaning • Remove rubbish, etc. from the wheels daily • Use a well-known degreasing agent, diluted to a suitable concentration • Rinse off loose grime using tepid water NOTE! Jamming, corrosion. Mechanical components can be damaged. After washing, the truck should be lubricated as set out in the chapter Maintenance and lubrication chart.

2.2. Cleaning the motor compartment • Cover the electric motors, connections and valves before washing NOTE! Risk of short-circuiting. The electrical system can be damaged. Electrical components must not be cleaned with a high pressure washing unit.

• Clean the motor compartment using a well-known degreasing agent, diluted to a suitable concentration • Rinse off loose grime using tepid water

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-412

2.3. Electrical components • Blow electric motors down using compressed air • Clean the electrical s, electronic boards, ors, connections, solenoid valves, etc. using a damp cloth and a cleaning agent NOTE! Risk of short-circuiting. Electrical components can be damaged. Do not break the guarantee seal on the electronic board.

3. Safe lifting All lifting must be carried out on a flat, non-slip and firm surface. Avoid new laid asphalt or asphalt on a hot summer’s day. • Activate the parking brake to prevent the truck from moving during the lift. If the lift applies to the brake wheel, chock the other wheels so that the truck stands still • Select a lifting point so that the lift is as easy as possible (one corner at a time). If the truck has marked lifting points on the under side of the chassis these can be used to obtain a well balanced lift • Ensure that the surface under the jack is clean and free from oil and grease • Ensure that your hands and the jack’s lever are free from oil and grease • Use the lever that belongs to the jack. A lever that is too short requires more force than is necessary. If the lever is too long there is a risk of the jack being overloaded • the truck: - as close to the part of the chassis that is lifted as possible to reduce the falling height if the truck tips over - so that the truck cannot roll • Never lift up the jack in order to lift higher • Never work under a lifted truck unless it is well ed WARNING! Risk of crushing. A badly ed truck can fall. Never work under a truck that is not ed on trestleblocks and secured by a lifting device. 4 (6)

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-412

4. Tilting the cab Make sure there is sufficient room for the tilted cab before you start work. Also make sure there is no risk of the cab accidentally being tilted back during the service. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk of personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

When you carry out a service in the motor compartment you should tilt the cab fully. While tilted, only the cab’s lift/lower functions are operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press the switch for cab lowering at the same time as the key is turned. The display shows 6 lines • Move the hydraulic lever for fork lift backwards • When the cab stops (at 15°), loosen the catch that releases the cab • Continue to move the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45°) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45°. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab controls the situation. Use a crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab fully • Insert the pin in the cylinder piston WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk of personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. The pin must always be inserted in the cylinder piston during service.

Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk of personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-412

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab back to the 45° position • Move the hydraulic lever for fork lift forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lowered position WARNING! Risk of tipping. The truck can tip if the battery is removed when the truck is tilted in the service position. Never remove the battery from the truck.

6 (6)

Service Manual

1998-01-30

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

P2 Service schedule

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

301-307,400

Service schedule Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

Check the following (Placement according to C-code; Intervals in hours regard running hours, b on the display).

Pos. No.

Work to carry out Interval in hours

5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000

Interval in days/weeks/months

1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

0300

Chassis

0300.1

Check the machine and load capacity signs

X

0300.2

Check for crack formation or damage

X

0300.3

Check the machine housing’s mounting on the arm

X

0300.4

Check the door locks

X

0300.5

Check for wear to the battery lock

X

0500

Operator’s cab/area

0500.1

Check the hinges on the cab tilt

X

0500.2

Check the operation of the emergency door

X

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-10

English

1 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT P2 Service schedule Version no

001

Pos. No.

T-code

301-307,400


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

0600

Cab area

0600.1

Check the seat mounting and the setting functions

0600.2

Check the operation of the foot pedals

0800

Safety equipment

0800.1

Check the finger guard

0800.2

Check for wear to the anti-slip guard

1700

Drive motor

1700.1

Check for loose connections

X

1700.2

Check the carbon brushes

X

1700.3

Clean the motor

X

1700.4

Tighten the mounting bolts

1700.5

Check for abnormal bearing noise

1700.6

Check the speed sensor

2550

Drive unit

2550.1

Check for leakage

X

2550.2

Check the oil level

X

2550.3

Check for noise

X

2550.4

Check the mounting on the arm

3100

Travel brake

3100.1

Clean the brake

X

3100.2

Check for wear on the brake discs

X

3100.3

Check for play in the released position

X

3100.4

Check the brake fluid level

X

3100.5

Check for wear to the brake pipes

X

3100.6

Check for leakage

X

2 (10)

Service Manual

X X

X X

X

1997-10-10

English

F-code

Section

RT

P2 Service schedule

Version no

T-code

001

Pos. No.

C-code

301-307,400


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

3300

Parking brake

3300.1

Check for wear to the wires

X

3300.2

Check for leakage

X

3500

Wheels

3500.1

Remove string and other rubbish

3500.2

Check for wear to the drive wheel and bolts

X

3500.3

Check that the arm wheels rotate and that the axles are fitted correctly

X

3500.4

Check for wear to the arm wheels

X

3500.5

Dismantle and grease the arm wheels’ bearings

4100

Steering system

4100.1

Check the mounting of the steering wheel

X

4100.2

Check the control ’s mounting and locking mechanism

X

4100.3

Check the gas cartridge’s capacity and locking mechanism

X

5100

Battery

5100.1

Check the electrolyte level (10-15 mm above the cell plate)

X

5100.2

Check the connections on the battery, truck and charger

X

5100.3

Check the cell and pole guard

X

5100.4

Check the fluid density and temperature

5100.5

Check the or point’s on the main or

X

5100.6

Check the or’s movement

X

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

X

X

X

1997-10-10

English

3 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

Pos. No.

T-code

301-307,400


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

5200

Instrument

5200.1

Read off and note the running time and logged error codes.

X

5200.2

Check that the display works

X

5300

Control system driving

5300.1

Check the emergency stop

X

5300.2

Check the ignition key

X

5300.3

Check the push buttons for extra functions

X

5300.4

Check the parking brake

X

5300.5

Check the microswitches and hydraulic levers

X

5300.6

Check the travel direction sensor

X

5400

Power system driving

5400.1

Clean and check mountings

X

5400.2

Tighten cable connections

X

5400.3

Check the or points for the travel direction

X

5400.4


X

5400.5

Check the transistor unit’s safety circuits

X

5500

Control system works section

5500.1

Check the operation of the electrical limiter

5700

Electronic card

5700.1

Clean the electronic card: blow clean with air and dry with a cloth

X

5700.2

Check s and cables

X

5700.3

Check the LEDs

X

4 (10)

Service Manual

X

1997-10-10

English

F-code

Section

RT

P2 Service schedule

Version no

T-code

001

Pos. No.

C-code

301-307,400


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

5800

Electric motor

5800.1

Check for play on connections

5800.2

Check the carbon brushes

5800.3

Clean the motor

5800.4

Check the mounting bolts

5800.5


X

5800.6

Check the fan motor

X

6100

Hydraulic unit

6100.1

Check hoses and couplings for leakage

X

6100.2

Check for wear to hoses and pipes

X

6100.3

Check the tank for leakage

X

6100.4

Check the oil level

X

6100.5

Change the oil

X

6100.6

Change the filter

X

6100.7

Check the max. pressure

6200

Control system

6200.1

Check valves for leakage

X

6200.2

Check the spring tension on the hose reel

X

7100

Mast and reach carriage

7100.1

Check for crack formation or damage

X

7100.2

Check the mast mountings

X

7100.3

Check for play on the rollers

X

7100.4

Check for wear to the lifting chains and chain sprockets

X

7100.5

Adjust the lifting chains

X

7100.6

Check hoses and couplings

X

© BT Products AB

X X

Service Manual

X

X

1997-10-10

English

5 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

Pos. No.

T-code

301-307,400


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1d

1w

1m

3m

6m

12 m

36 m

7300

Cylinders

7300.1

Check for leakage

X

7300.2

Check mountings

X

7400

Lift and turning tools

7400.1

Check for wear to forks and other lifting devices

9300

Extra electrical equipment

9300.1

Check the heater seat/screen

X

9300.2

Check the height-indication-preset and TV

X

9559

Other extra equipment

9550.1

Check the roller bed and the locking of the battery

6 (10)

Service Manual

X

X

1997-10-10

English

F-code

Section

RT

P2 Service schedule

Version no

T-code

001

5400 5700

C-code

301-307,400

7100 7300 7400

5500 6100 6200

5200 5300 4100

9300 5100 0600 0500 0300

9550

0800

6100 5800 3300

3100 5800 1700 3500

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-10

2550

English

7 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

1. Lubrication chart A description of the different types of oil can be found in the chapter Oil and grease specification. .

Pos. Service point no.

Interval/Running hours Lubricant 500h

1000h

3000h

3500

Wheel bearings

7100

Mast beam

L

F

0300

Reach rails

L

F

7100

Lifting chains

L

D

7200

Side shift

6100

Hydraulic system

C

3100

Travel brake

C

2500

Drive gear

C

0300

Hinges

L

A

4100

Steering bearings

L

G

4100

Gear ring

L

F

O

B

30/38 litres

O

E

0,4/0,8 litres

O

C

2,5/3,75 litres

L

Service Manual

A

L

L = Lubrication;

8 (10)

Volume

H C = Check;

1997-10-10

O = Oil change

English

F-code

Section

RT

P2 Service schedule

Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

7100

7200 0300

6100 3100

3500

2500 4100

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-10

English

9 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

10 (10)

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1997-10-10

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

P2 Preventive maintenance

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

002

401-414

Preventive maintenance Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

1 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT P2 Preventive maintenance Version no

002

T-code

401-414

1. Maintenance schedule Pos. no.

Work to carry out Intervals in hours

5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000

Intervals in Days/Weeks/Months

1D

1W

1M

3M

6M

12M

36 M

0000

Chassis

0000.1

Check for damage and crack formation

0340.1

Check the door lock

0390.1

Check wear and tear on battery lock

0510.1

Check the cab hinges and controls

A

0620.1

Check the seat mounting and the setting devices

X

0810.1

Check the machine housing and protective roof mounting

X

0820.1

Check the crushing protection

X

1700

Drive motor

1700.1


X

1700.2


X

1700.3


X

2550

Drive unit

2550.1

Check the oil level

2550.2

Change the oil

2550.3

Check for abnormal noise and leakage

2550.4

Check the mounting on the arm

X

2550.5

Lubricate the gear ring

H

3370

Brakes

3370.1

Check the brake disc for wear

3370.2

Check for play in the released position

X

3370.3

Check the brake torque

X

2 (10)

U

X X

U

X

X C2

Service Manual

C

U

X

X

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

RT Version no

T-code

002

Pos. no.

C-code

P2 Preventive maintenance 401-414


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1D

1W

1M

3M

6M

12M

36 M

3500

Wheels

3530.1


U

X

3530.2

Check for drive wheel wear and the bolts

U

X

3550.1


U

X

3550.2

Check the arm wheels’ rotation and mounting

U

X

3550.3

Check arm wheel for wear

U

X

4100

Control console

4100.1

Check the mounting and control console locking mechanism.

U

X

4100.2

Check the gas cartridge’s capacity and locking mechanism

U

X

5000

Electrical

5000.1

Clean and check the mounting

5000.2

Tighten cable connections

5000.3

Check driver control function

5000.4

Check emergency driving function

5000.5

Check error code and running time

U

X

5000.6

Check accessory functions

U

X

5190.1

Check or points

X

5190.2


X

5280.1

Check electrical limiting functions

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

X X4

X

U

X X

X

1997-10-02

English

3 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

Pos. no.

T-code

401-414


5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1D

1W

1M

3M

6M

12M

36 M

5110

Battery

5110.1

Check the electrolyte level (10-15 mm above the cell plates)

X

5110.2

Check the connections on the battery, truck and charger

X

5110.3

Check the cell and pole guard

X

5110.4

Check the fluid density

5110.5

Check the temperature

X

5110.6

Check the locking catch for wear

X

5110.7

Check the roll bed lock

X

5110.8

Extract excess fluid from the battery tray

5810

Pump motor

5810.1


X

5810.2


X

5810.3


X

5830

Steering motor

5830.1


X

5830.2


X

5830.3

Check the steering motor carbon brushes

X

6000

Hydraulic system

6110.1

Check the tank for leakage and its mountings

6110.2

Check the oil level

6110.3

Clean or change oil

6120.1

Check hoses, pipes and couplings

6130.1

Change air and return oil filter

6170.1

Check overflow pressure

X

6170.2

Check lowering speed

X

4 (10)

U

X

X

X X B

Service Manual

U

X X1

1997-10-02

X

English

F-code

Section

RT Version no

T-code

002

Pos. no.

C-code



5

20

80

250

500

1000

3000


1D

1W

1M

3M

6M

12M

36 M

7100

Mast and reach carriage

7100.1

Check for damage and crack formation

7110.1

Lubricate mast beams on runners and rails in the reach carriage

F

7120.1

Check for wear on the lifting chains and sprockets

X

7120.2

Lubricate the lift chains

D

7150.1

Check for play on the rollers

7190.1

Tighten the mast mounting

7200.1

Check extra functions

7400.1

Check for wear to the forks and other lifting devices

7300

Cylinders

7300.1

Check for leakage.

7300.2

Check the mountings.

X

X X3

X F

U

X

U

X X

1) Change filter after 50 - 100 hrs., and then every 1000 hrs. 2) Change oil after 50 -100 hrs., and then every 3000 hrs. 3) Check after 50 -100 hrs., and then every 1000 hrs. 4) Check after 50 -100 hrs., and then every 500 hrs. U represents what is found in the chapter “Daily service and function checks” in the Operator’s manual and is to be carried out at the 500 hour service. X shows what is to be done upon the different service occasions. Other letters show grade of oil or grease. When points are carried out according to higher hour intervals, even the points at lower time intervals are to be carried out, unless otherwise stated above.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

5 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

6 (10)

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

RT

Section

Version no

T-code

002

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

C-code


English

7 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

5000.3 5000.6 5280.1

5000.5

5000.4 4100.1 4100.2

5110.4 5110.5

5000.1 5000.2 5110.8

5110.6 5110.3 5110.1 5110.2 5110.7

5190.1 5190.2

5000.3 5000.6

5830.3 5810.3

5830.1 5830.2

5810.1 5810.2

8 (10)

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

RT

Section

Version no

T-code

002

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-02

C-code


English

9 (10)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

10 (10)

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

P3 Oil and grease specification

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

301-307,400

Oil and grease specification Valid from serial number:

Pos.

T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Lubricant

Specification

Notes

Application area

> - 15°C

< - 15°C

A

Grease

BT 26777 (Spray)

BT 26777 (Spray)

Bearings and bushings

B

Hydraulic oil

ISO-L-HM32

ISO-L-HV32

Hydraulic system

C

Transmission oil

Hypoid oil SAE 80W/90

Hypoid oil SAE 75W

Gears

D

Grease

BT 26778 (Spray)

BT 26778 (Spray)

Chains and wires

E

Fluid

DOT 3 - 4

DOT 3 - 4

Travel brake

F

Grease

BT 055-70111

BT 055-74320

Side shift forks

G

Grease

Staburags NBU 8EP

Staburags NBU 8EP

Steering bearings

H

Grease

Grafloscan A-G1 (Klüber)

Grafloscan A-G1 (Klüber)

Gear ring

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT P3 Oil and grease specification Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

2 (2)

Service Manual

1994-11-28

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

P3 Oil and grease specification

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

002

401-414

Oil and grease specification Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Pos.

Lubricant

Specification > - 15°C < - 15°C

Application area

A

Grease

Bearings and bushings

B C

Hydraulic oil Transmission oil

D

Grease

E F G H

Fluid Grease Grease Grease

BT 26777 (Spray) ISO-L-HM32 Hypoid oil SAE 80W/90 BT 26778 (Spray) DOT 3 - 4 BT 055-70111 Topas NB 52 Grafloscan A-G1 (Klüber)

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

BT 26777 (Spray) ISO-L-HV32 Hypoid oil SAE 75W BT 26778 (Spray) DOT 3-4 BT 055-74320 Topas NB 52 Grafloscan A-G1 (Klüber) 1997-10-02

Hydraulic system Gears Chains and wires Travel brake Side shift forks Steering motor gear Gear ring

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT P3 Oil and grease specification Version no

002

2 (2)

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-02

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

P4 Tools

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

Tools Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RRE5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-12-16

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT Tools

P4

Version no

T-code

001

C-code

401-414

1. Super Seal 1

3 3 2 Illustration

2 (4)

Service Manual

Number

Application

159232

Crimping of pins/sleeves

159229

Removal of lock (1)

159230

Insertion of secondary lock, 2 pin (2)

159231

Insertion of secondary lock, 4 pin (2)

159228

Removal of pins/sleeves (3)

1997-12-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

P4 Tools

Version no

T-code

001

401-414

AMP s

Illustration

2

© BT Products AB

Number

Application

31-151080

Removal of pins/sleeves

1=163787 2=163788

Crimping of sleeves

1=163789 2=163790 3=163791

Crimping of pins 1: For 0.2-0.5 mm2 2: For 0.5-1.0 mm2 3: For 1.5-2.5 mm2

1

Service Manual

1997-12-16

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT Tools

P4

Version no

T-code

001

C-code

401-414

Diverse tools

Illustration

-1 -2

Number

Application

156263

Service instrument (CAN)

1=163793 2=163792

Service instrument for program alteration

08-15444

Drive motor/Pump motor

31-150030

Cab tilt tool

Kpl=V1015191 1=V10-15191-1 2=V10-15191-2 3=V10-15191-3 4=V10-15191-4

Oil cleaning 1=Filter for cleaning 2=Filter for removal of water 3=Pipe 4=Pipe

-3 -4

4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-12-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S Content, S

IIssued by

Parts

Approved by

Version no

K Hallman

T-code

001

Content, S 1. Service instructions C-code

© BT Products AB

S 0.0

Chassis

0000

S 1.0

Primary motor

1000

S 2.0

Transmission/Drive gear

2000

S 3.0

Brakes/Wheels/Band

3000

S 4.0

Steering

4000

S 5.0

Electrical functions

5000

S 6.0

Hydraulics/Pneumatics

6000

S 7.0

Working functions, lift mast/Cylinders

7000

S 8.0

Peripheral equipment

8000

S 9.0

Accessories/Extra equipment

9000

Service Manual

1994-01-21

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S Content, S Version no

T-code

001

2 (2)

Service Manual

1994-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S0

C-code

0510 Cab attachment

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

305-307,400

Cab attachment Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General Trucks with a tilting cab are fitted with a cab tilt cylinder. The cylinder is located behind the drive unit. It is attached to the battery compartment wall and the under side of the cab.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

RT S0 Cab attachment Version no

001

C-code

0510

T-code

305-307,400

2. Dismantling Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

The cab must be tilted 90 degrees for service in the motor compartment. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to 90 degrees NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service.

• Unlock and swing open the door • Unscrew the return hose from the tank • Plug the return hose at the tank • Place the cab on blocks (e.g. pallets) or use a crane to prevent the cab from hanging on the cylinder • Undo the nuts holding the cylinder in place on the cab • Unscrew and remove the cylinder console from the battery compartment wall 2 (6)

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S0 0510 Cab attachment

Version no

C-code

T-code

001

305-307,400

• Pull out the cylinder in order to reach the hose connection • Undo the hydraulic hose • Remove the console from the cylinder

2.1. Dismantling the cylinder • Place the lower stop in a vice, allowing the upper part to rest against a yoke so that the cylinder is lying in a horizontal position • Knock the piston rod housing carefully with a rubber hammer • Unscrew the piston rod housing using a pipe wrench • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface • Knock out the top sleeve with a rubber hammer

2.2. Dismantling the piston rod seal and ring • Force a screw driver into the seal without marking the piston in any way NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage.

• Lift the piston rod seal very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston • Remove the ring

2.3. Assembling the piston rod seal and ring • Fit the ring and the piston rod seal on the piston

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

0510

T-code

305-307,400

2.4. Dismantling the piston • Remove the piston rod seal plus the ring • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston • Unscrew the piston using pipe wrench 08-15393 • Brush away the old sealant

2.5. Assembling the piston • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston in place using a hook wrench • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

2.6. Assembling the cylinder • Place the piston rod in the cylinder • Fit the top sleeve on the piston rod using a rubber hammer • Screw the top sleeve to the cylinder a few turns • Apply sealant FD 1042 to the thread • Tighten using a hook wrench NOTE! The drying time for the sealant is four hours, before which the cylinder must not be used.

4 (6)

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S0 0510 Cab attachment

Version no

C-code

T-code

001

305-307,400

3. Assembly • Fit the console on the cylinder • Attach the hydraulic hose • Screw the cylinder console in place on the battery compartment wall • Remove the plug from the return hose • Attach the return hose to the tank • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards until the cylinder is fully extended • Attach the cylinder to the cab • Swing the door shut and lock it WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is very great if the cab tilt cylinder does not have full oil pressure when the cab is tilted back. Check the oil pressure in the tilt cylinder.

Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section


001

6 (6)

C-code

0510

T-code

305-307,400

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S0 0840S Driver protection

C-code

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400-414

Driver protection Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

301

N1-N3, N1C-N3C/14

265200AA-

302

B1-B3, B1C-B3C/14

265200AA-

303

B4-B6, B4C-B6C/14

265200AA-

304

B7-B8, B7C-B8C/14

265200AA-

305

E1-E3, E1C-E3C/14

265200AA-

306

E4-E6, E4C-E6C/14

265200AA-

307

E7-E8, E7C-E8C/14

265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E4-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E4C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-10-22

English

Notes

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 0.0 Driver protection Version no

001

C-code

0840S 0

T-code

301-307,400301-

1. General Tilt stops are standard on certain trucks, and optional extras on others in order to increase their capacity. Tilt stops are located on the rear corners of the arms and consist of lugs, shims, bolts, washers and sealing.

2. Tilt stops 2.1. Maintenance To ensure the proper functioning of the truck it is important that the distance between the tilt stops and the floor is checked regularly. • Park the truck on a flat surface • Measure the distance between the tilt stop and the floor (max. 15 mm)

• If the tilt stop scrapes the floor or has a greater distance from the floor than 15 mm it must be adjusted 2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S 0.0 0840S 0 Driver protection

Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400301-

• Lift the back edge of the arm using a jack and place a block or similar under to prevent tipping • Break the sealing • Remove the bolts and washers • Re-shim so that the distance between the floor and the tilt stop is as close to 15 mm as possible. This distance must not be greater than 15 mm

• Fit any unused shims between the lug and the bolt's washer. • Fit the bolts and washers • Seal

2.2. Removal of tilt stops Certain tilt stops may be removed. Make careful note of the table below.

Truck

Lift height

Notes

RR N1

-5700 mm= max

Tilt stops may be removed

RR N2

-6300 mm= max Over 6300 mm

Tilt stops may be removed Tilt stops must not be removed

RR N3

-7000 mm= max Over 7000 mm

Tilt stops may be removed Tilt stops must not be removed

RR BE3

© BT Products AB

Tilt stops must not be removed

RR B/E7

-7000 mm


RR B/E8

-8000 mm


Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 0.0 Driver protection Version no

001

4 (4)

C-code

0840S 0

T-code

301-307,400301-

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S1

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

C-code

1700 Drive motor

Drive motor Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

1 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S1 Drive motor Version no

001

C-code

1700

T-code

401-414

1. General The drive motor is a three phase AC motor. The motor contains a thermoelement which measures the motors temperature, plus a bearing with an integrated measuring unit to measure the direction and speed of rotation. There are two sizes of drive motor on the truck. On N1-3 and B/N1-3 model D112 - 130 is used. On B/N5-8 model D112 - 165 is used.

2. Drive motor dismantled

2 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

F-code

Section

RT

S1

Version no

C-code

1700 Drive motor

T-code

001

401-414

3. Dismantling/assembling drive motor Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

During service in the motor compartment the cab must be fully tilted back. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards. • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab. • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees). WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab fully back. NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service.

A © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

1700

T-code

401-414

63 3.1. Dismantling the drive motor 14 31 • Cut the voltage by turning the key off and removing the battery plug. 60 • Disconnect the temperature, brake and speedometer cables (14, 31, 63), and power cables (60) from the motor 61 61 • Attach a lifting eye bolt to the motor. • Undo the screws (62) holding the motor in place. • Lift out the motor with the help of a crane and place on a clean surface. NOTE!

29 27 53 52

Risk of damaging the gear wheel (A). The gear wheel on the end of the motor can be damaged. Lift the motor out with care.

7 • Cover the hole in the gear when the motor has been removed so that foreign objects cannot fall in.

62

54

51 A

Dismantling the gear wheel • Bend the locking wing on the locking washer (53) on the end of the motor and undo the nut (54) and remove the washer (52). • Dismantle the gear wheel (51) with the help of a gear puller. • Remove the key (7) holding the gear wheel (51) in place.

37 38 55 6 33

• Remove the locking ring (27) holding the bearing cage (29) in place. • Remove the bearing cage (29) with the help of a gear puller. Dismantling the brake • Undo and remove the screws (37), washers (38) and remove the brake (33). • Remove the outer locking ring (16) from the crank shaft. • Remove the brake hub, key (6) and inner locking ring (16)

16

4 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

F-code

Section

RT

S1

Version no

T-code

001

37 38 55 6 33

C-code

1700 Drive motor

401-414

3.2. Assembling the drive motor Assembling the brake • Fit the inner locking ring (16) and key (6). • If the O-ring is damaged it must be replaced. • Make sure the friction disc (55) is centred in relation to the magnet house before trying to fit the brake. It may be necessary to charge the magnet coil with 48 V D.C. in order to position the brake disc. • Fit the brake unit to the motor. Check that the splines on the friction disc are not damage during assembly. • Tighten the screws (37) and washers (38) holding the brake unit in place.

16

• Fit the outer locking ring (16) Assembling the gear wheel • Fit the gear cage (29) to the crank shaft.

29 27 53 52

• Fit the locking ring (27) • Fit the key (7)

7 • Fit the gear wheel (51).

62

54

51 A

• Fit the washer (52) and a new locking washer (53) and the nut (54). • Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm • Bend one of the locking wings on the locking washer. • Attach a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft and lift it into the gear with the help of a crane. NOTE! Risk of damaging the gear wheel (A). The gear wheel on the motor can be damaged. Lift the motor out with care.

• Screw the motor (61) to the gear with a torque of 20 Nm • Connect the temperature, brake and speedometer cables (14, 31) and the power cables (60) to the motor. • Remove the lifting eye bolt.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

1700

T-code

401-414

Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab • Close the door and tighten the knob

A

6 (8)

• For adjustment of brakes, see chapter 3100

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

F-code

Section

RT

S1

Version no

C-code

1700 Drive motor

T-code

001

401-414

4. Replacing the bearing 14 31 53 52

23 51 12 11

54

2 4 10 1 9

40

24 22

8

25

3

34

37 38 55

6 33

D

7

N

27 26 50 28 29 30 21 20

17

5 18 16

4.1. Dismantling N-side • Remove the stud screws (20) using tool 08-15444 • Remove the screws (34) • Remove the shield (3) • Remove the locking ring (16) and ring (18) • Remove the bearing (5) with a claw puller • Remove the bearing cap (8) D-side • Remove the locking ring (26) from the bearing housing • Remove the sealing washer and remove the bearing (28) using a Kukko ball bearing puller • If the seal (30) is leaky it should be removed

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

1700

T-code

401-414

4.2. Assembling Before assembling, make sure that all parts are clean and whole. N-side • Fit the bearing cap (8) on the crank shaft • Press the bearing (5) onto the rotor axle • Fit the axle collar (17) using assembly sleeve XXXX • Fit the washer (18) and locking ring (16) • Assemble the bearing cap (8) and shield (3) using the screws (34) and a torque of 6 Nm • Fit the stud screws (20) with a torque of 5 Nm D-side • Fit the seal (30) to the bearing housing (29) • Press the bearing (28) into the bearing housing • Fit the locking ring (26)

8 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-14

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S2 2550 Transmission, Gear

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400

Transmission, Gear Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301

RR N1-N3, N1C-N3C

265200AA-

302

RR B1-B3, B1C-B3C

265200AA-

303

RR B4-B6, B4C-B6C

265200AA-

304

RR B7-B8, B7C-B8C

265200AA-

305

RR E1-E3, E1C-E3C

265200AA-

306

RR E4-E6, E4C-E6C

265200AA-

307

RR E7-E8, E7C-E8C

265200AA-

400

RR Cold store

265200AA-

Notes

1. General There are two types of drive units fitted to this range of trucks. These units are each attached to the chassis by 6 bolts. The drive shaft, together with motor, brake and transmitter for measuring speed, steering wheel direcrion and travel direction make up a complete drive unit. The drive unit is equipped with 360° steering. The gear in this truck is a 2-step angular gear with conical roller bearings for the drive shaft and pinion. The bearings are pre-tensioned approx. 5/100 of a millimeter to minimize the risk of play in the bearings. This service instruction covers descriptions for dismantling the gear from the truck and re-fitting the gear, filling/exchanging of oil and measures, in case of leakage. A complete overhaul of the gear is such an extensive job that it should only be done in a workshop by specially trained personnel.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

1 (20)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S2 Transmission, Gear Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

2550

2. Gear components/data The main components and data of the gear are shown in the picture and tables below.

2.1. Component identification 1

2

3

18 17 16 15 14

7 8 13 9 10 12 11

2 (20)

Pos No.

Component

1

Nipple, ventilation

2

Upper cover

3

Gear wheels, primary step

4

Pinion bearings

6

Shims, pinion bearings

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

4 5 5 4

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

Pos No.

Component

6

Pinion

7

Lower cover

8

Crown wheel

9

Drainage plug

10

O-ring

11

Drive shaft bearings

12

Locking ring

13

Spacer

14

Drive shaft

15

Drive shaft sealing

16

Seal protection

17

Shims, drive shaft bearings

18

Gear housing

2.2. Technical gear data

© BT Products AB

Truck type

RT

Gear, type

2-step angular

Gear ratio

16,13:1

Oil volume

Se chapter 4.1

Oil type

Hypoid oil

Oil

SAE W/90

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

3 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

2.3. Dismantled gear

4 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Replacement of drive motor/driving gear Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

The cab must be tilted 90 degrees for service in the motor compartment. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

5 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

3.1. Dismantling the drive motor • Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat • Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft • Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake • Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780 • Unscrew the 4 screws holding the brake shield (5) in place and lift it off • Switch off the power with the key and disconnect the battery connector • Remove the motor, carbon brush, fan and sensing device cables from the drive motor (7) • Remove the sensing device (22) from the drive motor (7) • Remove the motor’s fixing screws (6) and attach a lifting eye bolt to the end of the crank shaft • Lift out the motor with the help of a crane NOTE! Risk of damage to gear wheel. The gear wheel in the motor end can be damaged. Lift out the motor with care.

• Cover the hole in the driving gear when the drive motor has been removed to prevent any foreign matter from falling in • Bend up the locking tab on the locking washing (12) on the end of the steering motor and unscrew the nut (13) holding the gear wheel (10) in place • Remove the gear wheel (10) using a puller • Remove the key which holds the gear wheel in place • Remove the locking ring (21) which holds the bearing bracket (20) in place • Remove the bearing bracket (20) with the help of a puller

6 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.2. Dismantling the driving gear • Remove the four screws holding the fender in place and lift it off • Lift the machine using a jack and place it on blocks • For trucks equipped with a steerwheel indicator: disconnect the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (8) and steerwheel direction (9) • Disconnect the steering motor’s and remove the from its socket on the tank plate • Undo the screws on the steering motor and remove it from the driving gear • Remove the six bolts (14) which hold the driving gear cover (15) to the arm • Remove the driving gear (17) and the cover (15) from the truck • Unscrew and remove the drive wheel • Undo the six bolts (18) holding the driving gear to the cover (15) and remove the cover (15) • Replacement of steering bearing (16): Undo the fifteen socket head bolts (19) and remove the steering bearing (16) from the driving gear (17)

3.3. Assembling the driving gear • Replacement of steering bearing (16): Fit the new steering bearing (16) in place in the driving gear (17) with the fifteen socket head bolts (19) using LOCTITE 242 and a torque of 23 Nm • Screw the new driving gear (17) in place on the cover (15) • Screw the drive wheel in place with a torque of 130 NM • Put the driving gear (17) in position in the truck • Screw the driving gear (17) in place on the arm together with the cover (15) using the six bolts (14) and a torque of 222 Nm • Fit new O-rings and, if necessary, a new seal on the steering motor • Screw the steering motor in place on the driving gear cover and reconnect the s © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

7 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

• For trucks equipped with a steerwheel indicator: Turn the steerwheel until an edge is visible through the hole for the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (8) • Screw the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (18) in place so that it reaches bottom against the edge. It must then be unscrewed 1 1/2 turns and locked in place with the locking nut • Screw the steerwheel’s direction indicators (19) (blue in the hole nearest the fender and grey nearest the battery) in place so that they reach bottom. Then turn them back 1 1/4 turns and lock them in place with the locking nut Lubricate the entire steering bearing (16) with Grafloscon A-G1

3.4. Assembling the drive motor If you have replaced the driving gear (17), you must also replace the gear wheel (10) on the drive motor. If you have replaced the drive motor, use the old gear wheel for the new motor. • Fit the bearing bracket (20) to the crankshaft • Fit the locking ring (21) • Knock in the key • Fit the gear wheel (10) • Fit a washer (11) and a new locking washer (12) and nut (13) • Tighten to 60 Nm • Remove any protection from the hole for the drive motor on the driving gear • Top up with oil, see chapter 4.1 • Screw in a lifting eye bolt on the drive motor (7) and lift it into the driving gear (17) with the help of a crane NOTE! Risk of damage to gear wheel (17). The gear wheel (10) in the motor end can be damaged. Fit the motor with care.

• Screw the drive motor (7) in place in the driving gear (17) with a torque of 20 Nm • Fit the motor speed transmitter (22) into the drive motor 8 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

• Connect the motor, carbon brush indicator, fan and sensing device cables to the drive motor • Screw the brake shield (5) in place on the drive motor using new locking washers and a torque of 25 Nm • Plug in the battery connector and switch on the power with the key • Press the parking brake button to release the brake • Place the brake drum (4) back in position and fix in place with a new locking nut. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm • Fit the cover plate (3) on the brake drum (4) Truck with tilting cab: Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch • Remove the pin from the cylinder piston • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab: • Remove the sliding bow (159747) and reconnect the seat switch • Close the door and tighten the knob

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

9 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

4. Oil level check/replacing 4.1. Check/filling of oil • The oil level in the gear should be checked every 250 working hours • Check the oil level by removing the oil filling plug on the upper part of the gear housing • Fill oil up to the hole to get the correct oil level. Hypoid oil MP SAE (=W/90) in driving gear B1-B3: approx. 2.5 litre B4-B8: approx. 3.8 litre N1-N3: approx. 2.5 litre

4.2. Oil replacement The oil should be replaced after every 1000 working hours or a minimum of once a year.

2

1

1. Drain off the old oil by removing the drainage plug (1) 2. Use a new copper seal (2) when the drainage plug is refitted 3. Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions 4. Check that no leakage occurs from the drainage plug

10 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

5. Repairs 5.1. Exchange of drive shaft sealing ring It is easiest to replace the drive shaft sealing rings when the drive unit is dismantled from the truck. In the case of oil leakage from the drive shaft follow the procedure below: 5.1.1. Dismantling: 1. Drain the gear of oil 2. Dismantle the drive unit from the truck as set out below: - Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat - Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft - Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake - Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780 - Unscrew the 4 screws holding the brake shield (5) in place and lift it off - Switch off the power with the key and disconnect the battery plug - Remove the motor, carbon brush, fan and sensing device cables from the drive motor (7) - Remove the four screws holding the fender in place and lift it off - Lift the machine using a jack and place it on blocks - For trucks equipped with a steerwheel indicator: disconnect the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (8) and steerwheel direction (9) - Disconnect the steering motor’s and remove the from its socket on the tank plate - Undo the screws on the steering motor and remove it from the driving gear - Remove the six bolts (14) which hold the driving gear cover (15) to the arm - Remove the driving gear (17)

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

11 (20)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

2550

3. Remove the drive wheel from the gear 4. Remove the lower gear cover 5. Loosen the drive shaft nuts. Remove the nuts, locking washers and spacer ring 6. Knock out the drive shaft using a brass punch and a hammer 7. Pull off the bearing from the drive shaft using a bearing puller NOTE! A normal clamp puller cannot be used to pull off the bearing. Using a KUKKO bearing puller.

8. Remove the seal ring from the drive shaft

8

7 5

4 6

12 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

5.1.2. Assembly: When assembling the gear after replacing the drive shaft seal, follow the procedure described below.

4

2 3

1

4

5 1. Place the drive shafts outer bearing in the gear housing. 2. Press the new seal ring in place in the gear housing. Be careful when pressing it in place so that the seal is seated correctly in the gear housing 3. Press the drive shaft into the gear housing. Check that the splines on the drive shaft are aligned with the splines on the crown wheel 4. Place the spacer ring and locking washer onto the drive shaft end and screw in the shaft bolts. Always use new bolts.The drive shaft nut must be lubricated prior to being fitted to the shaft. Tighten the shaft bolts with a torque of 110 Nm. Lock the shaft bolt by bending up the locking washer 5. Before fitting the lower cover, change the O-ring. Fit the cover and tighten the bolts to 25 Nm. Make sure that the O-ring is not damaged when fitted. The bolts should be greased prior to assembly 6. Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions, section 4.1 7. Fit the drive wheel and tighten the wheel nut with a torque of 88 Nm. The wheel nuts should be greased prior to being fitted 8. Fit the drive unit in the truck as set out below - Screw in a lifting eye bolt on the drive motor (7) and lift it into the driving gear (17) with the help of a crane - Connect the motor, carbon brush indicator, fan and sensing device cables to the drive motor

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

13 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

- Screw the brake shield (5) in place on the drive motor using new locking washers and a torque of 25 Nm - Plug in the battery connector and switch on the power with the key - Press the parking brake button to release the brake - Place the brake drum (4) back in position and fix in place with a new locking nut. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm - Fit the cover plate (3) on the brake drum (4) Truck with tilting cab: - Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

- Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Remove the pin from the cylinder piston - Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position - Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab: - Remove the sliding bow (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Close the door and tighten the knob

14 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

5.2. Leakage from the top cover When there is leakage from the gear’s top cover follow the procedure described below:

1. Dismantle the gear from the truck as set out below: - Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat - Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft - Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake - Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780. - Unscrew the 4 screws holding the brake shield (5) in place and lift it off - Switch off the power with the key and disconnect the battery plug - Remove the motor, carbon brush, fan and sensing device cables from the drive motor (7) - Remove the four screws holding the fender in place and lift it off - Lift the machine using a jack and place it on blocks - For trucks equipped with a steerwheel indicator: disconnect the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (8) and steerwheel direction (9) - Disconnect the steering motor’s and remove the from its socket on the tank plate - Undo the screws on the steering motor and remove it from the driving gear © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

15 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

- Remove the six bolts (14) which hold the driving gear cover (15) to the arm 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

- Remove the driving gear (17) Loosen all bolts holding the top cover to the gear housing Remove the cover from the gear housing and clean the sealing surfaces of the cover and gear housing carefully Apply sealant type Curil K2 to the surfaces. Follow the instructions given on the container Fit the cover bolts and tighten with a torque of 25 Nm. The bolts should be greased prior to assembly Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions, section 4.1 Fit together the drive gear and the drive motor and fit the drive unit in the truck as set out below: - Screw in a lifting eye bolt on the drive motor (7) and lift it into the driving gear (17) with the help of a crane - Connect the motor, carbon brush indicator, fan and sensing device cables to the drive motor - Screw the brake shield (5) in place on the drive motor using new locking washers and a torque of 25 Nm - Plug in the battery connector and switch on the power with the key - Press the parking brake button to release the brake - Place the brake drum (4) back in position and fix in place with a new locking nut. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm - Fit the cover plate (3) on the brake drum (4)

Truck with tilting cab: - Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

- Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Remove the pin from the cylinder piston - Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position - Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position 16 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

Truck without tilting cab: - Remove the sliding bow (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Close the door and tighten the knob

5.3. Leakage from the lower cover 1. Drain out the remaining oil from the drive gear 2. Dismantle the cover from the drive gear 3. Replace the seal on the drain plug and the O-ring on the cover 4. Fit the cover and tighten the bolts to a torque of 25 Nm. Ensure the O-ring is not damaged. The bolts should be greased before fitting

5.4. Replacing the wheel bolt

1. Dismantle the drive gear from the truck as set out below: - Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat - Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft - Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake - Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780 - Unscrew the 4 screws holding the brake shield (5) in place and lift it off © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

17 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2550

- Switch off the power with the key and disconnect the battery plug - Remove the motor, carbon brush, fan and sensing device cables from the drive motor (7) - Remove the four screws holding the fender in place and lift it off - Lift the machine using a jack and place it on blocks - For trucks equipped with a steerwheel indicator: disconnect the indicator for the steerwheel’s centre (8) and steerwheel direction (9) - Disconnect the steering motor’s and remove the from its socket on the tank plate - Undo the screws on the steering motor and remove it from the driving gear - Remove the six bolts (14) which hold the driving gear cover (15) to the arm 2. 3. 4. 5.

- Remove the driving gear (17) Dismantle the drive shaft from the gear as described under “Dismantling” in chapter “Repairs” Press or knock out the damaged bolt from the drive shaft rim Smooth away any burring around the bolt hole and press or knock the new bolt into place Fit the drive shaft into the gear as described under “Assembly” in chapter “Repairs”

NOTE! Always use a new drive shaft seal when fitting drive shaft.

6. Fit the drive gear/drive unit in the truck as set out below: - Screw in a lifting eye bolt on the drive motor (7) and lift it into the driving gear (17) with the help of a crane - Connect the motor, carbon brush indicator, fan and sensing device cables to the drive motor - Screw the brake shield (5) in place on the drive motor using new locking washers and a torque of 25 Nm - Plug in the battery connector and switch on the power with the key - Press the parking brake button to release the brake - Place the brake drum (4) back in position and fix in place with a new locking nut. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm - Fit the cover plate (3) on the brake drum (4) 18 (20)

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

Truck with tilting cab: - Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

- Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Remove the pin from the cylinder piston - Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position - Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab: - Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch - Close the door and tighten the knob

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

19 (20)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

20 (20)

C-code

2550

Service Manual

1997-02-21

English

F-code

Section

RT

S2 2550 Transmission/gear

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

002

401-414

C-code

Transmission/gear Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General There are two types of drive units fitted to this range of trucks. These units are each attached to the chassis by 6 bolts. The drive shaft, together with motor, brake and transmitter for measuring speed, steering wheel direction and travel direction make up a complete drive unit. The drive unit is equipped with 360° steering. The gear in this truck is a 2-step angular gear with conical roller bearings for the drive shaft and pinion. The bearings are pre-tensioned approx. 5/100 of a millimetre to minimize the risk of play in the bearings. This service instruction covers descriptions for dismantling the gear from the truck and re-fitting the gear, filling/exchanging of oil and measures, in case of leakage. A complete overhaul of the gear is such an extensive job that it should only be done in a workshop by specially trained personnel.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

1 (14)

F-code

Section

RT S2 Transmission/gear Version no

002

C-code

2550

T-code

401-414

2. Drive unit/gear components/data The main components and data of the gear are shown in the picture and tables below.

2.1. Component identification

2 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT Version no

T-code

002

© BT Products AB

401-414

Pos No.

Component

1

Drive motor

2

Drive unit cover

3

Guide bearing

4

Upper gear cover with gear ring

5

Gear wheels, primary step

6

Pinion nut

7

Pinion

8

Pinion bearings

9

Shims, pinion bearing

10

Lower gear cover

11

Drive shaft nut

12

Washer

13

Crown wheel

14

O-ring

15

Drive shaft bearings

16

Shims, drive shaft bearings

17

Seal protection

18

Drive shaft sealing

19

Drive shaft

20

Gear housing

Service Manual

1997-10-28

C-code


English

3 (14)

F-code

Section


002

C-code

2550

T-code

401-414

2.2. Technical gear data Truck type

RR 1-3

RR 5-8

Gear, type

2-step angular

2-step angular

Gear ratio

19.20:1

20.89:1

Oil volume, litre

2.8

3.3

Oil type

Hypoid oil

Hypoid oil

Viscosity, normal temperature

SAE 80W/90

SAE 80W/90

Viscosity, < -15o C

SAE 75W

SAE 75W

2.3. Dismantled gear

4 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

002

401-414

3. Replacement of drive motor/driving gear Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the driver’s seat and open the door Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

During service in the motor compartment the cab must be fully tilted back. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab fully back. NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service.

A © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

5 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

2550

T-code

401-414

3.1. Dismantling the drive motor 63 14 31 60

61

• Switch off the power with the key and disconnect the battery connector • Disconnect the temperature, brake and speedometer s (14, 31, 63), and the power cables (60) from the motor (61) • Attach a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft • Remove the motor’s fixing screws • Lift out the motor with the help of a crane and place it on a clean surface

29 27 53 52

NOTE! Risk of damage to gear wheel. The gear wheel in the motor end can be damaged. Lift out the motor with care.

7

62

54

51 A

• Cover the hole in the gear where the motor was removed to prevent foreign objects from falling into the gear Dismantling the gear wheel • Bend out the locking wing on the locking washer (53) on the end of the motor and remove the nut (54) and the washer (52) • Remove the gear wheel (51) using a puller • Remove the key (7) which holds the gear wheel in place • Remove the locking ring (27) which holds the bearing bracket (29) in place • Remove the bearing bracket (29) with the help of a puller

6 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

002

401-414

3.2. Dismantling the driving gear • Remove the four screws holding the fender in place and lift it off • Lift the machine using a jack and place it on blocks • For trucks equipped with a steer wheel indicator: disconnect the indicator for the steer wheel’s centre (8) and steer wheel direction (9) • Disconnect the steering motor’s and remove the from its socket on the tank plate • Undo the screws on the steering motor and remove it from the driving gear • Remove the six bolts (14) which hold the driving gear cover (15) to the chassis • Remove the driving gear (17) and the cover (15) from the truck • Unscrew and remove the drive wheel • Undo the six bolts (18) holding the driving gear (17) to the cover (15) and remove the cover (15) • Dismantling the steering bearing (16): Undo the fifteen socket head bolts (19) and remove the steering bearing (16) from the driving gear (17)

3.3. Assembling the driving gear • Assembling the steering bearing (16): Fit the steering bearing (16) in place in the driving gear (17) with the fifteen socket head bolts (19) using LOCTITE 242 and a torque of 25 Nm • Screw the new driving gear (17) in place on the cover (15). Lubricate the bolts (18) and screw in place with a torque of 80 Nm • Screw the drive wheel in place with a torque of 130 NM • Put the driving gear (17) in position in the truck • Screw the driving gear (17) in place in the chassis together with the cover (15) using the six bolts (14) and a torque of 222 Nm • Fit new O-rings and, if necessary, a new seal on the steering motor © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

7 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

2550

T-code

401-414

• Fit the steering motor in place on the driving gear cover. The screws should be tightened with a torque of 40 Nm • Connect the steering motor’s s (10) • For trucks equipped with a steer wheel indicator: Turn the steer wheel until an edge is visible through the hole for the indicator for the steer wheel’s centre (8) • Screw the indicator for the steer wheel’s centre (8) in place so that it reaches bottom against the edge. It must then be unscrewed 1 1/2 turns and locked in place with the locking nut • Screw the steer wheel’s direction indicator (9) (Red LED against the battery compartment) so that it reaches bottom and then unscrew it 1 1/4 turns and lock it in place with the locking nut

3.4. Assembling the drive motor If you have replaced the driving gear (17), you must also replace the gear wheel (51) on the drive motor. If you have replaced the drive motor, use the old gear wheel for the new motor. 3.4.1. Assembling the gear wheel • Fit the bearing bracket (29) to the crankshaft • Fit the locking ring (27)

29 27 53 52

• Knock in the key (7) • Fit the gear wheel (51)

7

62

54

51 A

• Fit a washer (52) and a new locking washer (53) and nut (54) • Tighten to 60 Nm • Bend a wing on the locking washer • Fit a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft and lift it into the gear with the help of a crane NOTE! Risk of damage to gear wheel (A). The gear wheel in the motor end can be damaged. Fit the motor with care.

• Screw the motor (61) in place in the gear with a torque of 20 Nm • Connect the temperature, brake and speedometer s (14, 31) and the power cables (60) to the motor • Remove the lifting eye bolt 8 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

002

401-414

Truck with tilting cab: Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston

A

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab: • Close the door and tighten the knob • To adjust the brake, see chapter 3100

4. Oil level check/replacing 4.1. Check/filling of oil • The oil level in the gear should be checked every 250 working hours • Check the oil level by removing the oil filling plug on the upper part of the gear housing • Fill oil up to the hole to get the correct oil level. Hypoid oil MP in driving gear • SAE 80W/90 for operation at normal temperature SAE 75W for operation in cold store, <-15° C • Oil volume: B1-B3: approx.2.8 litres B4-B8: approx.3.3 litres N1-N3: approx. 2.8 litres

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

9 (14)

F-code

Section


002

C-code

2550

T-code

401-414

4.2. Oil replacement The oil should be changed in the gear after the first 50-100 hours running time and then after every 3000 hours running time

• Draining the old oil out of the gear is done by removing the lower gear cover completely • Change the O-ring seal at every oil change. Make sure that the new O-ring isn’t damaged when assembled • Fit the cover and tighten the bolts 25 Nm. The bolts shall be lubricated prior to assembly • Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions

10 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

002

401-414

5. Repairs 5.1. Exchange of drive shaft sealing ring It is easiest to replace the drive shaft sealing rings when the drive unit is dismantled from the truck. In the case of oil leakage from the drive shaft follow the procedure below: 5.1.1. Dismantling: • Dismantle the drive unit from the truck as set out in chapter “Replacement drive motor/driving gear” • Remove the lower gear cover and drain the gear from oil • Loosen the drive shaft nut. Remove the nut and spacer ring • Knock the drive shaft out gently with a brass drifter and a hammer • Pull the bearing off the drive shaft NOTE! A normal clamp puller cannot be used to pull off the bearing. Using a KUKKO bearing puller.

• Make sure that the gear’s spacer washers are not damaged. If they have been damaged, measure their total thickness and replace them before assembly • Remove the seal ring from the drive shaft

7 6 5

2 3

4

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

11 (14)

F-code

Section


002

C-code

2550

T-code

401-414

5.1.2. Assembly When assembling the gear after replacing the drive shaft seal, follow the procedure described below.

• Place the drive shafts outer bearing in the gear housing • Press the new seal ring in place in the gear housing. Be careful when pressing it in place so that the seal is seated correctly in the gear housing • Fit the axle bearing’s spacers onto the drive shaft, with the same total thickness as the original spacers. Make sure that only undamaged spacers are used • Press the drive shaft, with spacers, into the gear housing. Check that the splines on the drive shaft are aligned with the splines on the crown wheel • Place the spacer ring on to the drive shaft end and fit the shaft nut. Always use a new nut. The drive shaft nut must be lubricated before being fitted to the axle. Tighten the nut with a torque of 700 Nm and lock it using a centre punch in the groove on the axle • Before fitting the lower cover, change the O-ring. Make sure that it is not damaged when fitted. Fit the cover and tighten the bolts 25 Nm. The bolts must be lubricated prior to assembly • Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions

12 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

002

401-414

5.2. Leakage from the top cover When there is leakage from the gear’s top cover follow the procedure described below:

• Dismantle the gear from the truck as set out in chapter “Replacement drive motor/driving gear” • Loosen all bolts holding the top cover to the gear housing • Remove the cover from the gear housing and clean the sealing surfaces of the cover and gear housing carefully • Apply sealant type Curil K2 to the surfaces. Follow the instructions given on the container • Fit the cover bolts and tighten with a torque of 46 Nm. The bolts should be greased prior to assembly • Fill up oil in accordance with filling instructions • Fit together the drive gear and the drive motor and fit the drive unit in the truck as set out in chapter “Replacement drive motor/driving gear”

5.3. Leakage from the lower cover 1. Drain out the remaining oil from the drive gear 2. Dismantle the cover from the drive gear 3. Replace the seal on the drain plug and the O-ring on the cover • Fit the cover and tighten the bolts to a torque of 25 Nm. Ensure the O-ring is not damaged. The bolts should be greased before fitting

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

13 (14)

F-code

Section


002

C-code

2550

T-code

401-414

5.4. Replacing the wheel bolt The wheel bolts on the gear are stud bolts. Replace the wheel bolts as follows: of stud

• • • • •

Disconnect the battery’s emergency disconnector Remove the fender by the drive wheel from the chassis Lift the machine using a jack and place on blocks Dismantle the drive wheel Wheel bolts with damaged threads: Should be removed with the help of a stud bolt tool • Broken bolts: • Method 1: Drill a hole in the centre of the bolt and unscrew with the help of a screw extractor for M14-bolts • Method 2: If it is not possible to remove the bolt with a screw extractor, it must be drilled out - Punch the bolt making sure the punch is centred accurately - Drill a start hole in the bolt using a 5 mm drill. Drill through the bolt using a 11.5 mm drill - Try to remove the rest of the bolt using pliers for example. If this does not work, clear the hole using a M14x 1.5 thread tap • Apply LOCTITE 270 to the wheel bolt’s thread. Fit the new wheel bolt using the stud bolt tool. Tightening torque: 80 Nm • Fit the drive wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts with a torque of 130 Nm • Remove the blocks and lower the truck • Fit the fender • Connect the emergency battery disconnector 14 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-28

English

F-code

Section

RT

S 3.0

C-code

3000 Brakes

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400

Brakes Valid for serial no :

T-kod

Modell

Serial No

301


296949AA-

302


296949AA-

303


296949AA-

304


296949AA-

305


296949AA-

306


296949AA-

307


296949AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

296949AA-

Anm.

1. General The brake system consists of service brake and parking brake. The truck may also be fitted with arm brakes. Service brake The service brake is a manually controlled hydraulic brake. When the brake pedal is pressed, the piston in the main cylinder is forced out, increasing the pressure and, in turn, pushing out the pistons in the drive-unit brakes. This causes the brake lining to press against the brake drum. Where there are arm brakes, these will receive the same pressure increase and help to stop the truck. Parking brake When the parking brake switch is pressed, both connectors to the electronic circuit are inactivated. The valve will then open and drain the oil from the brake cylinder with the help of the return spring. The return spring stretches the brake cable which in turn presses the brake shoe against the brake drum. See chapter 5000.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-04-14

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

RT Brakes

C-code

S 3.0

Version no

3000

T-code

001

301-307,400

2. Symbols Symbol

Description

Function

Remark

1

Tank

Brake fluid reservoir

DOT 3-4

2

Cylinder

Left arm brake

3

Cylinder

Right arm brake

4

Cylinder

Main brake cylinder

5

Cylinder

Driving motor brake

6

Valve

Pressure reduction valve

preset to 55 bar

3. Hydraulic diagram

2 (2)

Service Manual

1997-04-14

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S3 3100 Brake system, without arm brake IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

001

401-406,409-412

Brake system, without arm brake Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC

1. General The truck’s travel brake system is made up of two different sub-systems. 1. Regenerative motor braking with the drive motor. 2. A one-step electromechanical disc brake mounted on the motor. This is also the truck’s parking brake.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

1 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S3 3100 Brake system, without arm brake Version no

001

T-code

401-406,409-412

2. Description of function The travel brake system’s primary function is the regenerative motor braking from the drive motor. Braking can take place in three different ways: • When the accelerator is released • By changing direction with the travel direction control, normal motor braking • By pressing the brake pedal

2.1. Releasing the accelerator The regenerative motor brake is activated automatically when the accelerator is released. The braking force can be set, via a parameter, by the operator. See C-code 5710. The force of the motor brake is regulated progressively in relation to the current speed of the truck and how far the accelerator pedal is released. This works as follows: • Braking at high speed, accelerator released fully, results in a high braking force. • Braking at low speed, accelerator released fully, results in a low braking force. • Braking at high speed, accelerator released half way, gives a medium braking force. 2 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

401-406,409-412

2.2. Changing travel direction The braking force is regulated by the position of the accelerator pedal, i.e. the more the pedal is pressed the greater the braking force.

2.3. Pressing the brake pedal When the brake pedal is pressed down approx. 80% of it’s stroke length, full regenerative braking is achieved. If the brake pedal is pressed between 80 - 100%, further braking force is added due to the electro-magnetic disc brake on the drive motor being activated. On the border line of 80%, the motor braking is reduced in proportion to the disc brake’s braking force in order to avoid jerking or locking the wheels, see illustration.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

401-406,409-412

2.4. Parking brake The parking brake is activated/active as follows: • The parking brake is activated automatically when the truck stops, when driving and the truck is brought to a stop with the help of the brake pedal. The brake is released when the accelerator is pressed. • The parking brake is activated automatically when the operator gets out of the truck, a few seconds delay. • The parking brake remains activated after the key switch has been turned on.

2.5. Emergency braking Emergency braking of the truck can occur in the event of a system error or a serious fault in the electrical system. • The electromechanical disc brake on the drive motor is the primary emergency brake. • The motor brake can function during emergency braking provided that the power supply is functioning.

4 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

401-406,409-412

3. Electromechanical disc brake, drive motor The brake is a one-step electromechanical spring action brake which is released by charging the magnet coil. The brake acts as a parking brake, emergency brake and a secondary travel brake at the end of the brake pedals stroke.

3.1. Assembling 1

7

9

11

13

8 6

2 5

3

10

4

• Fit the hub (3) on the crank shaft. • Fit the O-ring (10) in the recess on the hub. • Make sure that the friction disc (4) is centred in relation to the magnet house before assembling the brake. It may be necessary to charge the magnet coil with 48 V D.C. in order to position the brake disc. • Fit the brake unit in the motor. Make sure that the friction disc’s splines are not damaged during assembly. • Fit and tighten the four screws holding the brake unit in place. • Remove the screws (9) for manual release. • Check the play between the magnet house and the pressure plate with the brake fitted. The play should be 0.20-0.35 mm. This may need adjusting, see section on adjustment. • Connect the brake’s cable harness (11) to the truck’s electrical system. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

401-406,409-412

• Turn the ignition key on and release the parking brake. Check that the friction disc rotates freely. Cut the voltage and check that the pressure plate locks the friction disc and that there is the correct amount of play (0.20-0.35 mm). NOTE! The seat switch must be closed. Use jumper 159747 to secure the switch in order to work without sitting in the driver’s seat. Safety first! Bear in mind that the system is live.

3.2. Dismantling • Dismantle the brake in the reverse order to which it was assembled. • Place the brake on a clean, dry work surface with the magnet house (1) uppermost. • Unscrew the 3 adjusting screws (8) gradually in order to reduce the spring tension gradually and evenly. • The brake unit can now be completely dismantled for inspection of its components. 3.2.1. Inspection Examine parts for damage and/or wear. • Examine the brake disc with particular care (4) and the working surface of the pressure plate (2). • Examine the springs (7) and spacers (6) for damage. NOTE! Bear in mind that the distance nut is made of brass.

• Inspect the splines on the hub (3) and the friction disc (4) for damage. • Examine the magnet (1) and pressure plate (2) for signs of swelling or damage. 3.2.2. Assembling • Clean all parts thoroughly. • Assemble the brake in the reverse order to which it was dismantled. • Bear in mind the following: - a: That the holes in the pressure plate (2) are centred over the corresponding holes in the magnet house. - b: That the correct number of springs have been fitted. - c: That the amount of play (0.20-0.35 mm) is correct, adjust if necessary. 6 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

401-406,409-412

3.3. Maintenance The brakes are included in the maintenance schedule for the truck. See section P2.0 for service intervals. Maintenance includes checking and adjusting the amount of play between the pressure plate and the magnet house, checking wear and braking force. NOTE! Friction surfaces must not come in with oil or grease as this will seriously reduce the braking force of the brakes.

3.3.1. Adjustment of play • The amount of play must be checked after every 1000 hours running time. • The amount of play (A) is measured between the magnet house and the pressure plate in three places, next to the adjustment sleeves (6), with the brake engaged. • The nominal amount of play when correctly adjusted is 0.20-0.35 mm. • The maximum play permitted before adjustment becomes necessary is 0.45 mm. • Tools: Thickness gauge, 14 mm spanner and a 6 mm Allen key. • Undo the three screws (8). • Adjust the amount of play between the three adjustment sleeves (6) to 0.20-0.35 mm. Use a thickness gauge at the side of the sleeve while adjusting. Turn anticlockwise to reduce and clockwise to increase the amount of play. • Tighten the screws with a torque of 20 Nm • Re-check the amount of play after tightening the screws. Repeat the adjustment if necessary until the correct amount of play is achieved. • Check the amount of play all the way round the pressure plate. The maximum deviation allowed is 0.075 mm. 3.3.2. Wear • Check the friction disc for signs of wear after every 3000 hours running time. • Dismantle the brake according to the dismantling instructions.

Min 6,0 • Measure the thickness of the friction disc. Minimum thickness = 6.0 mm © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

401-406,409-412

3.3.3. Checking the braking force The braking force must be checked after every 1000 hours running time. • Lift the truck so that the drive wheel is off the floor. • Open the motor compartment cover. • Tools: Torque wrench set to 90 Nm and an M12 flanged bolt, or a normal bolt and flat washer. NOTE! The quality of the bolt must be at least 10.9

• Screw the M12 bolt in the hole (for lifting eye bolt) in the crank shaft. • Rotate the crank shaft using the torque wrench until the brake releases. • If the brake releases before the correct torque has been reached, the braking force is too low. • Adjust the amount of play in the brake to the correct value, see Adjustment of play. • Re-check the braking force using the torque wrench.

8 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S3 3100 Brake system with arm brakes IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

002

401-414

Brake system with arm brakes Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial number

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General The truck’s travel brake system is made up of three different sub-systems. 1. Regenerative motor braking with the drive motor. 2. Two analogue electromechanical multiple disc brakes fitted in the arm wheels. 3. A one-step electromechanical disc brake fitted to the motor.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

1 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S3 3100 Brake system with arm brakes Version no

002

T-code

401-414

3

1 2

2. Description of function The primary braking function of the travel brake system is the regenerative motor brake from the drive motor. Braking can be carried out in three ways: • By releasing the accelerator. • By changing travel direction with the travel direction control, normal motor braking. • By pressing the brake pedal.

2 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

2.1. Releasing the accelerator The regenerative motor brake is activated automatically when the accelerator is released. The braking force can be set, via a parameter, by the operator. See C-code 5710. The force of the motor brake is regulated progressively in relation to the current speed of the truck and how far the accelerator pedal is released. This works as follows: • Braking at high speed, accelerator released fully, results in a high braking force. • Braking at low speed, accelerator released fully, results in a low braking force. • Braking at high speed, accelerator released half way, gives a medium braking force.

2.2. Changing travel direction The braking force is regulated by the position of the accelerator pedal, i.e. the more the pedal is pressed the greater the braking force.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

3 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

2.3. Pressing the brake pedal When the brake pedal is pressed down approx. 80% of it’s stroke length, full regenerative braking is achieved. If the brake pedal is pressed between 80 - 90%, further braking force is added due to the electromechanical disc brake on the drive motor being activated. On the border line of 80%, the braking torque of the motor brakes disc brake is reduced in order to avoid jerking or locking the wheels, see illustration.

4 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

2.4. Parking brake The parking brake is activated/active as follows: • The parking brake is activated automatically when the truck stops, when driving and the truck is brought to a stop with the help of the brake pedal. The brake is released when the accelerator is pressed. • The parking brake is activated automatically when the operator gets out of the truck, a few seconds delay. • The parking brake remains activated after the key switch has been turned on.

2.5. Emergency braking Emergency braking of the truck can occur in the event of a system error or a serious fault in the electrical system. • The electromechanical disc brake on the drive motor is the primary emergency brake. • The motor brake can function during emergency braking provided that the power supply is functioning.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

5 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

3. Electromechanical disc brake, drive motor The brake is a one-step electromechanical spring action brake which is released by charging the magnet coil. The brake acts as a parking brake, emergency brake and a secondary travel brake at the end of the brake pedals stroke.

3.1. Assembly 1

7

9

11

13

8 6

2 5

3

10

4

• Fit the hub (3) on the crank shaft. • Fit the O-ring (10) in the recess on the hub. • Make sure that the friction disc (4) is centred in relation to the magnet house before assembling the brake. It may be necessary to charge the magnet coil with 48 V D.C. in order to position the brake disc. • Fit the brake unit in the motor. Make sure that the friction disc’s splines are not damaged during assembly. • Fit and tighten the four screws holding the brake unit in place. • Remove the screws (9) for manual release. • Check the play between the magnet house and the pressure plate with the brake fitted. The play should be 0.200.35 mm. This may need adjusting, see section on adjustment. • Connect the brake’s cable harness (11) to the truck’s electrical system. 6 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

• Turn the ignition key on and release the parking brake. Check that the friction disc rotates freely. Cut the voltage and check that the pressure plate locks the friction disc and that there is the correct amount of play (0.20-0.35 mm). NOTE! The seat switch must be closed. Use jumper 159747 to secure the switch in order to work without sitting in the driver’s seat. Safety first! Bear in mind that the system is live.

3.2. Dismantling • Dismantle the brake in the reverse order. • Place the brake on a clean, dry work surface with the magnet house (1) uppermost. • Unscrew the 3 adjusting screws (8) gradually in order to reduce the spring tension gradually and evenly. • The brake unit can now be completely dismantled for inspection of its components. 3.2.1. Inspection Examine parts for damage and/or wear. • Examine the brake disc with particular care (4) and the working surface of the pressure plate (2). • Examine the springs (7) and spacers (6) for damage. NOTE! Bear in mind that the distance nut is made of brass.

• Inspect the splines on the hub (3) and the friction disc (4) for damage. • Examine the magnet (1) and pressure plate (2) for signs of swelling or damage. 3.2.2. Assembling • Clean all parts thoroughly. • Assemble the brake in the reverse order to which it was dismantled. • Bear in mind the following: - a: That the holes in the pressure plate (2) are centred over the corresponding holes in the magnet house. - b: That the correct number of springs have been fitted. - c: That the amount of play (0.20-0.35 mm) is correct, adjust if necessary. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

7 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

3.3. Maintenance The brakes are included in the maintenance schedule for the truck. See section P2.0 for service interval. Maintenance includes checking and adjusting the amount of play between the pressure plate and the magnet house, checking wear and braking force. NOTE! Friction surfaces must not come in with oil or grease as this will seriously reduce the braking force of the brakes.

3.3.1. Adjustment of play • The amount of play must be checked after every 1000 hours running time. • The amount of play (A) is measured between the magnet house and the pressure plate in three places, next to the adjustment sleeves (6), with the brake engaged. • The nominal amount of play when correctly adjusted is 0.20-0.35 mm. • The maximum play permitted before adjustment becomes necessary, is 0.45 mm. • Tools: Thickness gauge, 14 mm spanner and a 6 mm Allen key. • Undo the three screws (8). • Adjust the amount of play between the three adjustment sleeves (6) to 0.20-0.35 mm. Use a thickness gauge at the side of the sleeve while adjusting. Turn anticlockwise to reduce and clockwise to increase the amount of play. • Tighten the screws with a torque of 20 Nm • Re-check the amount of play after tightening the screws. Repeat the adjustment if necessary until the correct amount of play is achieved. • Check the amount of play all the way round the pressure plate. The maximum deviation allowed is 0.075 mm. 3.3.2. Wear • Check the friction disc for signs of wear after every 3000 hours running time. • Dismantle the brake according to the dismantling instructions.

Min 6,0 • Measure the thickness of the friction disc. Minimum thickness = 6.0 mm 8 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

3.3.3. Checking the braking force The braking force must be checked after every 1000 hours running time. • Lift the truck so that the drive wheel is off the floor. • Open the motor compartment cover. • Tools: Torque wrench set to 90 Nm and an M12 flanged bolt, or a normal bolt and flat washer. NOTE! The quality of the bolt must be at least 10.9

• Screw the M12 bolt in the hole (for lifting eye bolt) in the crank shaft. • Rotate the crank shaft using the torque wrench until the brake releases. • If the brake releases before the correct torque has been reached, the braking force is too low. • Adjust the amount of play in the brake to the correct value, see Adjustment of play. • Re-check the braking force using the torque wrench.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

9 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

4. Multiple disc brake, arm The brake is an analogue electromagnetic multiple disc brake, i.e. the brake is engaged by charging the magnet coil. The voltage in the magnet coil is regulated by a potentiometer in the brake pedal and thereby regulates the braking force. The multiple discs are made of steel. The brake functions as a secondary travel brake and is used when the operator needs to brake hard, >50% of the maximum available braking force. The brake is fitted in the arm on a hub with splines and a locking heel which takes up the braking force. The arm wheel must be removed from the truck in order to check and service the brake, see C-code 3550. The magnet coil, however, can be checked with the wheel in place. All instructions given here require that the wheel be removed first.

4.1. Assembly • Make sure that the brake engages and releases when intended. Connect the brake to 48 V D.C. Turn the current off and on. • Check that the amount of play between the end plate (6) and the pressure plate (2) is 1.0-1.25 mm with the current on (brake engaged). It may be necessary to adjust the amount of play, see section on adjusting. NOTE! Check the amount of play at two points simultaneously with 180° between check points.

• Fit the brake into the arm wheel, making sure that the inner disc’s splines are positioned correctly so that they reach the wheel hub without being obstructed. • Fit the wheel in the arm according to instructions C-code 3550. Make sure that the locking heel (8) is positioned correctly in its recess in the arm. • Connect the brake cable harness (14) and check the braking function by pressing the brake pedal fully down.

10 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

4.2. Dismantling

• Remove the brake from the arm wheel. • Place the brake on a clean, dry work surface with the end plate (6) uppermost. NOTE! Take care that the components and cable harness are not damaged during this and following operations.

• Undo and remove the six M6x40 socket head screws (12) and their washers. • Remove the aluminium end plate (6). NOTE! Make note of the number of shims (11) on every spacer (5).

• Lift off the pressure plate (2) and the disc unit which consists of 3 outer discs (3) and two inner discs (4). • Remove the brass plate (7).

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

11 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

T-code

401-414

4.2.1. Inspection • Check the thickness of the discs. The nominal thickness of a new disc = 2.0 mm. Limit for wear = 1.4 mm • When replacing discs: Replace all inner and outer discs at the same time. Never individually. • Check that the discs are flat and that there is no damage to the splines or the recess. • Check the electrical resistance of the magnet coil. Nominally 47.7 Ohm at 20°C. NOTE! The resistance measurement can be made with the brake/ wheel fitted in the truck.

4.2.2. Assembling • Clean all parts thoroughly. NOTE! Use only a wire brush and water for cleaning.

• Assemble the brake in the reverse order to which it was dismantled. • Connect the brake to 48 V D.C. • Check the amount of play between the end plate and the pressure plate (brake engaged). Adjust if necessary.

4.3. Maintenance The brake is included in the maintenance schedule. For service intervals see Maintenance schedule section P2. Maintenance includes checking and adjusting the amount of play between the pressure plate and the end plate, checking for wear and the magnet coil’s resistance as well as cleaning. • Cleaning and checking/adjustment of play must be carried out after every 1000 hours running time. • Checking for wear and checking the magnet coil’s resistance must be carried out after every 3000 hours running time.

12 (14)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

002

401-414

4.3.1. Adjusting the amount of play • Dismantle the arm wheel from the truck and remove the brake. • Connect the brake to 48 V D.C.

• Check the amount of play, measurement A, with the brake engaged. NOTE! Check the amount of play at two points simultaneously with 180° between check points.

• Maximum permitted play = 2.25 mm • The nominal amount of play on a newly adjusted brake is 1.0-1.25 mm. • Remove the aluminium end plate before adjusting. • Remove the shims when adjusting due to wear, or add shims when replacing with new discs. Each shim has a thickness of 0.127 mm. • Fit the aluminium end plate, connect to 48 V D.C. and check the amount of play. • When the amount of play is within the nominal permitted limits, assemble the brake in the wheel and the wheel in the truck. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

13 (14)

F-code

Section

C-code


002

14 (14)

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

S 3.0

C-code

3120 Main cylinder

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307, 400

Main cylinder Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General The main brake cylinder is a spring-loaded cylinder with two piston rod seals. The fork link is attached to the brake pedal by a fork pin. When the brake pedal is pressed the fork link pushes the piston in, forcing out the oil to each of the brakes. When the brake pedal is released a spring in the cylinder draws back the piston and oil reducing the pressure in the brakes. The brake pedal should have 1-2 mm play so that the pressure in the brake cylinder can be fully released.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S3 Main cylinder Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

3120

2. Dismantling • Remove the brake hose (1) and, if necessary, the brake pipe (2) from the main cylinder (4) • Remove the filler hose (3) from the main cylinder (4) • Unscrew the accelerator and remove it from the truck • Remove the pin from the fork link (12) • Remove the two screws which attach the cylinder to the accelerator

3. Replacing the piston rod seal and spring • Remove the rubber gaiter (11) from the cylinder (4) • Remove the locking spring (10) and washer (9) • Remove the piston (7) from the cylinder (4) • Remove the spring (5) from the cylinder (4) • Lift the piston rod seals (6, 8) and carefully cut them off with a knife • Fit the new piston rod seals (6, 8) to the piston (7) • Fit the new spring (5) in the cylinder (4) • Fit the piston (7) into the cylinder (4) • Fit the washer (9) and locking spring (10) onto the piston (7). Press the piston down with the help of the fork link (12) and fit the locking spring (10) using long nosed pliers • Fit the rubber gaiter (11) onto the cylinder (4) • Fit the fork link (12) into the rubber gaiter (11)

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

S3

C-code

3120 Main cylinder

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

4. Assembly • Screw the cylinder in place on the accelerator • Fit the pin in the fork link • Fit the accelerator into the truck • Reconnect the brake hose and, where necessary, the brake pipe to the cylinder • Adjust the fork link allowing approximately 2 mm play before the pin strikes the piston • Bleed the brakes, see chapter “Bleeding the brake system”

5. Bleeding the brake system You must bleed the brake system when you replace the cylinder or if, for some reason, there is air in the system • Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid • Connect a hose to the bleeder nipple having first loosened it a little. Place the other end of the hose in a bottle • Press the brake pedal repeatedly until no more air bubbles appear • Tighten bleeder nipple • Pump up the pedal pressure by pressing the brake pedal • Loosen the bleeder nipple • Depress the brake pedal fully and check that no air bubbles appear • Tighten the bleeder nipple and release the pedal. Remove the hose • Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S3 Main cylinder Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

4 (4)

C-code

3120

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

S3 3140 Distributing valve

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400

C-code

Distributing valve Valid from machine number: T-kod

Modell

Serial Nr

301


296949 AA-

302


296949 AA-

303


296949 AA-

304


296949 AA-

305


296949 AA-

306


296949 AA-

307


296949 AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

296949 AA-

Anm.

1. General In order to reduce the brake pressure on the driving motor brake a pressure limiting valve is fitted. This valve is preset to 55 bar.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

RT S 3.0 Distributing valve Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

3140

2. Description of function Truck without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. Truck with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

The cab must be tilted 90 degrees for service in the motor compartment. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display now shows 6 lines. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards. • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab. • Continue pulling the hydraulic lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees). WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab 90 degrees. NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service.

2 (6)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 3.0 3140 Distributing valve

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Dismantling 3

• Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft.

4

• Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake.

5 6 7

• Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat.

8 9 12 10 11

• Adjust the brake shoes to their innermost position with the adjustment screw. • Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780 • Remove the brakes two springs (5) by pressing them down and moving them sideways. • Loosen the ends of the other two springs (6,7) from the holes and remove them. • Remove both brake shoes (8) from the shield plus the parking brakes wire from the loop (9) in the arm. • Remove the four screws on the bottom of the shield (11) and remove the shield from the crankshaft. • Loosen the brake hoses banjo coupling on the underside of the brake and make sure the oil doesn’t leak out.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

3140

4. Assembly • Screw together loosely, bracket (12), pressure limiting valve (13), pipe (14), and banjo coupling (15), leaving room for adjustment. • Fix the bracket (12) to the brake shield (11) with spacer (16) in between. • Connect the banjo coupling (15) to the cylinder (10) with the hollow screw (17). • Tighten screws (18, 19), the hollow screw (17) and the pipe (14). • Remove the plug (20) and connect the brake hose in its place. • Refit the brake shield (11) using new washers. Tighten with a torque of 24 Nm. • Attach the parking brake wire to the loop in the arm (9). • Position the brake shoes (8) on the shield (11). • Refit the springs (6,7). Attach spring (6) to the upper side of the brake shoe and spring (7) to the underside. • Refit springs (5) by pushing them through the holes in both the brake shoe and the shield and move them sideways into position.

3

• Refit the brake drum (4) and fix into place using new locking nuts. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm. • If you have replaced the cylinder, bleed the brake system according to chapter “Bleeding the brake system”.

4

• Press the brake pedal to centre the brake shoes. • Tighten the adjustment screw under the brake shield (11) so that the brake shoes lock the brake drum.

5 6 7

8 9

• Release the screw so that the brake shoes no longer touch the drum. The amount of play between the brake drum and brake shoes should be approx. 0.3-0.5 mm. • Refit the cover plate (3).

12 10 11

4 (6)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 3.0 3140 Distributing valve

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

5. Bleeding the brake system 3

You must bleed the brake system when you replace the cylinder or if, for some reason, there is air in the system • Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid

4

• Connect a hose to the bleeder nipple (12) having first loosened it a little. Place the other end of the hose in a bottle

5

• Press the brake pedal repeatedly until no more air bubbles appear

6 7

8 9 12 10 11

• Tighten bleeder nipple (12) • Pump up the pedal pressure by pressing the brake pedal • Depress the brake pedal fully and check that no air bubbles appear • Tighten the bleeder nipple (12) and release the pedal. Remove the hose • Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch • Remove the pin from the cylinder piston • Take hold of the protective roof and return the cab to the 45 degree position • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position Truck without tilting cab • Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch • Close the door and tighten the knob © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

6 (6)

C-code

3140

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 3.0 3160 Drum brake, disc brake

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400

Drum brake, disc brake Valid from machine number: T-code

Model

Serial No.

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Comments

1. General The trucks service brake is a drum brake. The driving motor brake has a separate brake drum located above the driving motor brake. On the arm brake it is the arm wheel which constitutes the brake drum. The arm brake is situated in the arm wheel. Carry out dismantling and assembly as follows.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S 3.0 3160 Drum brake, disc brake Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

2. Description of function Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

The cab must be tilted 90 degrees for service in the motor compartment. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards. • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab. • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees). WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.


2 (6)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Dismantling 3

4

• Remove the four screws holding the cover plate (3) over the brake drum (4) plus the locking nuts on the crankshaft. • Turn on the power using the key then press the button for the parking brake to loosen the brake.

5 6 7

• Disconnect the seat switch under the seat and secure it with a jumper (159747). You can now work on the truck without having to sit in the drivers seat.

8 9 12 10 11

• Adjust the brake shoes to their innermost position with the adjustment screw. • Remove the brake drum (4) with tool no. 08-11780. • Remove the brakes two springs (5) by pressing them down and moving them sideways. • Loosen the ends of the other two springs (6,7) from the holes and remove them. • Remove both brake shoes (8) from the shield. • Remove the four screws on the bottom of the shield (11) and remove the shield from the crankshaft. • Loosen the brake hoses banjo coupling on the underside of the brake and make sure the oil doesn’t leak out. • Remove the cylinder (10) by loosening the screws on the back side of the brake shield (11). • Remove the cylinder (10) and fasten the new one in place. • Connect the banjo coupling to the cylinder (10). • Replace the brake shield (11) using new washers. Tighten with a torque of 24 Nm.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

4. Assembly • Attach the parking brake wire to the loop in the arm (9). • Position the new brake shoes (8) on the brake shield (11). • Refit the springs (6, 7). Attach spring (6) to the upper side of the brake shoe and spring (7) to the underside. 3

• Refit the brake drum (4) and fix into place using new locking nuts. Tighten with a torque of 60 Nm.

4

• If you have replaced the cylinder, bleed the brake system according to chapter “Bleeding the brake system”.

5

• Press the brake pedal to centre the brake shoes.

6 7

• Refit springs (5) by pushing them through the holes in both the brake shoe and the shield and move them sideways into position.

8 9 12 10 11

• Tighten the adjustment screw under the brake shield (11) so that the brake shoes lock the brake drum. • Release the screw so that the brake shoes no longer touch the drum. The amount of play between the brake drum and brake shoes should be approx. 0.3-0.5 mm. • Refit the cover plate (3).

5. Bleeding the brake system You must bleed the brake system when you replace the cylinder or if, for some reason, there is air in the system. • Check the level of brake fluid in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid. • Connect a hose to the bleeder nipple (12) having first loosened it a little. Place the other end of the hose in a bottle. • Press the brake pedal repeatedly until no more air bubbles appear. • Tighten bleeder nipple (12). • Pump up the pedal pressure by pressing the brake pedal. • Depress the brake pedal fully and check that no air bubbles appear. • Tighten the bleeder nipple (12) and release the pedal. Remove the hose. • Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If necessary, top up with more brake fluid.

4 (6)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab back. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the jumper (159747) and reconnect the seat switch. • Remove the pin from the cylinder piston. • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position. Truck without tilting cab • Remove the sliding bow (159747) and reconnect the seat switch. • Close the door and tighten the knob.

6. Dismantling the arm brake • Place the arm on blocks so that the wheel hangs loose. • Remove the cover plate from the arm wheel. • Undo the socket head screws from the inside of the arm which hold the brake shield in place. • Unscrew the brake pipe from the banjo coupling. • Knock out the wheel axle from the arm. • Lift out the wheel. • Lift out the brake shield from the wheel. • Pull down the brake shoes towards the brake cylinder so that you can remove the clamp from the top of the brake shoes. • Remove the springs which hold the brake shoes in place. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

7. Dismantling the brake cylinder • Unscrew the banjo coupling from the brake cylinder. • Unscrew the brake cylinder.

8. Assembling the brake cylinder • Screw the brake cylinder onto the brake shield. • Screw on the banjo coupling at the same angle it had earlier.

9. Assembling the arm brake • Refit the springs that hold the brake shoes in place. • Refit the clamp on top of the brake shoes. • refit the brake shield in the arm wheel. • Lift the wheel back into the arm and knock the axle back in place. • Screw the brake pipe back onto the banjo coupling. • Apply LOCTITE 243 to the socket head screws. • Tighten the socket head screws with a torque of 79 Nm. • Tighten the brake adjusting screw until the wheel locks. Then release the screw a quarter turn. • Bleed the brakes, Follow the procedure in chapter: “Bleeding the brake system” • Screw the cover plate back in place on the arm wheel. • Remove the blocks from under the arm.

6 (6)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

S 3.0

C-code

3530 Drive wheel

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H. Forsman

001

301-307, 400

Drive wheel Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

301


265200AA-

301

302


265200AA-

302

303


265200AA-

303

304


265200AA-

304

305


265200AA-

305

306


265200AA-

306

307


265200AA-

307

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

1. General The drive wheel is made up of a cast rim with a vulcanized tread. When replacing the drive wheel it is important that the wheel nuts are tightened with the correct torque. Two different wheel sizes have been used on the Reflex truck. One with five holes for the wheel bolts and one with seven holes. The smaller wheel (5 holes) is used on models N/B/E1- N/B/ E3. The larger wheel (7 holes) is used on models B/E5-B/E8.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

RT S 3.0 Drive wheel Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400

C-code

3530

2. Dismantling the drive wheel • Lift the truck and place on blocks so that the drive wheel is hanging free • Undo the four screws holding the cover plate in place • Remove the cover plate • Undo the nuts holding the drive wheel in place • Remove the drive wheel

3. Assembling the drive wheel • Lift the new drive wheel into position • Apply molykote grease BT number 055-73040 to the wheel bolts • Fit the spherical washers in place on the wheel bolts • Screw on the wheel nuts and tighten with a torque of 130 Nm • Fit the cover plate • Remove the blocks from under the truck

2 (2)

Service Manual

1997-05-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

S3

C-code

3530 Drive wheel

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

002

301-307,401-414

Drive wheel Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial n°

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E4-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E4C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

Note

1 (2)

F-code

Section

RT S3 Drive wheel Version no

002

C-code

3530

T-code

301-307,401-414

1. General The drive wheel is made up of a cast rim with a vulcanized tread. When replacing the drive wheel it is important that the wheel nuts are tightened with the correct torque. Two different wheel sizes have been used on the Reflex truck One with the dimensions diam. 310x120 mm and the other 350x130 mm. The smaller wheel (310 mm) is used on models N/B/E1- N/B/ E3. The larger wheel (350 mm) is used on models B/E5-B/E8.

2. Dismantling the drive wheel • Lift the truck and place on blocks so that the drive wheel is hanging free • Undo the four screws holding the cover plate in place • Remove the cover plate • Undo the nuts holding the drive wheel in place • Remove the drive wheel

3. Assembling the drive wheel

• Lift the new drive wheel into position • Apply molykote grease BT number 055-73040 to the wheel bolts • Fit the spherical washers in place on the wheel bolts • Screw on the wheel nuts and tighten with a torque of 130 Nm • Fit the cover plate • Remove the blocks from under the truck 2 (2)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S3 3550 arm wheel

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K Hallman

001

301-307,401-414

arm wheel Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial no.

Notes.

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E4-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E4C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General Five different types of wheel are used on reach trucks. Each wheel is fitted in the arm with a one-piece axle and an adapter sleeve. The axle has a threaded hole to be used when dismantling and assembling. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

RT S3 arm wheel Version no

001

C-code

3550

T-code

301-307,401-414

Truck type

Wheel diameter, mm

Brake/No brake

N1-3, B1-3, E1-3

265

No

N1-3, B1-3, E1-3

300

No

N1-3, B1-3, E1-3

300

Yes

B5-6, E5-6

350

No

B5-6, E5-6, B7-8, E7-8

350

Yes

2. Dismantling the wheel • Lift the truck and place on blocks so that the arm wheel is hanging free • Undo the two screws holding the cover plate in place over the wheel • Remove the cover plate For wheel with brakes: • Disconnect the or/cable harness from the arm brake For wheel with brakes: • Undo the locking screw on the brake lock • Remove the axle using tool 08-13585. Use the short insert tool

• Lift out the wheel For wheel with brakes: • Remove the brake unit from the wheel 2 (6)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S3 3550 arm wheel

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3. Assembling the wheel 265 mm och 300 mm wheel without brake

300 mm wheel with brake and 350 mm wheel

For wheel with brakes: • Position the brake unit in the wheel. • 265 mm wheel and 300 mm wheel without brakes: Fit the spacers (1) in place on the hub. • Position the wheel in the arm. NOTE! For wheels with brakes, guide the brake lock into its recess in the arm.

• In order to centre the wheel vertically, use a jack to adjust the height of the arm. • Check that the axle (3) is not damaged. Minor lengthwise scratches can be accepted. If the ends of the axel are punched the axle should be ground or replaced.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

3550

T-code

301-307,401-414

• Fit a new adapter sleeve (2) on the axle (3). WARNING! Loose wheels. If the wheel is reassembled using the old adapter sleeve the wheel can come loose when driving. Always use a new adapter sleeve when fitting the wheel on the axle.

• Fit the extension sleeve on the tool 08-13585 and insert it through the wheel into the arm.

• Fit the axle to the insert tool and insert the axle carefully. Be careful not to insert the axle too far. When the axle has been correctly inserted it must be centred in the arm’s wheel clamp. • Lower the truck. • For wheel with brakes: Tighten the locking screw on the brake lock and reconnect the brake’s cable harness. Secure the cable harness to the bracket for the cover plate with a strap so that it cannot rub against and be damaged by the wheel. • Fit the cover plate.

4 (6)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S3 3550 arm wheel

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

4. Dismantling/assembling the wheel bearing 4.1. 265 mm wheel and 300 mm wheel without brakes 4.1.1. Dismantling the bearing • Remove the spacer (1). • Remove the circlips (2). • Press out the sleeve (3). • Use a “soft” tool of brass or similar to knock out the bearing (4).

4.1.2. Assembling the bearing • Press in the bearing (4). Use an assembly sleeve with the same diameter as the bearing’s outer ring, 90 mm. • Make sure that the sleeve (3) is not damaged. • Fit one of the circlips (2) on the sleeve. • Press in the sleeve until the circlip is stopped by the bearing. • Fit the other circlip. • Fit the spacers (1) in place on the hub.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


3550

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

4.2. 300 mm wheel with brake and 350 mm wheel 4.2.1. Dismantling the bearing • Undo the assembly nut (1). Tool: Socket no. 808-410 • Remove the locking washer (2) • Press out the sleeve (3) • Pull the bearing off the sleeve (4) and remove the seal (5) • Remove the seal (6) and the bearing (7) • Use a “soft” tool of brass or similar to knock the bearing cup (8) from the hub

1

2

7

6

7

6

8

5

8

1

3

4

4

1

5

3

2

4.2.2. Assembling the bearing • Fit the bearing cup in the hub. Use an assembly tool with the same outer diameter as the, bearing cup 80 mm. • Place the sealing ring (5) on the sleeve. • Press the sleeve into the bearing(4). • Apply bearing grease to the bearing and place the sleeve with the bearing in the wheel . Guide the sealing ring into position in the hub. • Press the bearing (7) on the other side of the wheel. • Fit the sealing ring (6) in the hub. • Fit the locking washer (2) and the barrel nut (1). • Tighten the nut with a torque of 50 Nm. Tool 808-410 and torque wrench. The threads must be lubricated before assembly. • Lock the nut by bending down at least one of the wings on the washer.

6 (6)

Service Manual

1997-10-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

S4 4100 Steering system

C-code

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307, 400-414

Steering system Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General The steering generator is located in the steering and has direct with the steering wheel. When the steering wheel is turned impulses are sent from the steering generator to the steering motor via the logic box. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-29

English

1 (2)

F-code

Section

RT S4 Steering system

C-code

4100

Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400-414

2. Replacement of the steering generator 2.1. Dismantling • Undo the 11 screws on the lower and remove it • Disconnect the or on the steering motor • Dismantle the steering wheel by removing the 4 screws round the steering motor • Undo the screws on the carrier and remove it from the steering motor • Undo the 4 screws holding the steering motor to the steel console

2.2. Assembly • Fit the steering motor to the steel console with the 4 screws • Screw the carrier to the steering motor’s axle • Replace the O-rings on the carrier, if necessary • Screw the steering wheel in place on the steel console • Connect the steering motor’s electrical or • Fit the lower in place with the 11 screws

2 (2)

Service Manual

1997-10-29

English

F-code

Section

RT

S 5.0 5000 Electrical system

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

C-code

Electrical system Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301

RR N1-N3, N1C-N3C

265200AA-

302

RR B1-B3, B1C-B3C

265200AA-

303

RR B4-B6, B4C-B6C

265200AA-

304

RR B7-B8, B7C-B8C

265200AA-

305

RR E1-E3, E1C-E3C

265200AA-

306

RR E4-E6, E4C-E6C

265200AA-

307

RR E7-E8, E7C-E8C

265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General The trucks electronic system is built up around the electronic card (see chapter 5710) which is powered by 48 VDC from the battery. The electronic card receives signals from the switches, transducers and potentiometers and sends them to the transistor s (see chapter 5460), displays, horn and proportional valves. The transistor s provide the pump and drive unit with power.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

1 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2. Symbols and circuit diagrams 2.1. List of symbols Symbol

© BT Products AB

Description

Symbol

Description

Battery

Brake (coil)

or

Diode

Emergency stop

Fuse

Horn

Inductive sensor

Inductive sensor (normally closed)

Inductive sensor (normally open)

Magnet switch (normally closed)

Magnet switch (normally open)

Motor

Potentiometer

Push-button switch (normally closed)

Push-button switch (normally open)

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

2 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

Symbol

© BT Products AB

Description

C-code

301-307,400

Symbol

Description

Resistance

Switch

Key switch

Switch (normally closed)

Switch (normally open)

Valve

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

3 (34)

F-code

Section

RR


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.2. Circuit diagram (1/11)

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

4 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

5 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

6 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

7 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

8 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

9 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

10 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

11 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

12 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

13 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

14 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.13. List of components Symbol Designation

Function

Diagram

A1


Drive motor

1

A2


Pump motor

1

A5

Electronic card

Main card

1

A6

Elektronic unit

Display

3

A7

Electronic unit

Height selector

2

A8

Electronic unit

Height indication

7

BT

Battery

+48 V

C1

Capacitor

Noise suppression H1

E10

Heater

Seat warmer

F1

Fuse 160A

Drive motor

1

F3

Fuse 200/300A

Pump motor

1

F50

Fuse 10A

Control current

1

F51

Fuse 30A

Steering motor

1

H1

Horn

K10

or

Main or

1

K11

or

Driving in fork direction

1

K13

or

Driving in drive wheel direction

1

M1

Motor

Drive motor

1

M3

Motor

Pump motor

1

M6

Motor

Steering motor

1

M10

Fan

Pump motor

1

© BT Products AB

1

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

15 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

Symbol Designation

Function

Diagram

M11

Fan

Drive motor

1

M12

Fan

Electronics

1

R1

Potentiometer

Speed control, driving

1

R11

Potentiometer

Speed control, fork lift

2

R12

Potentiometer

Speed control, mast in/out

2

R13

Potentiometer

Speed control, tilt

2

R14

Potentiometer

Speed control, extra functions

2

S10

Switch

Parking brake, manoeuvring

2

S17

Switch

Ignition

3

S18

Switch

Horn

2

S19

Switch

Foot step

S20

Switch

Parking brake position

1

S21

Switch

Emergency stop

3

S23

Switch

Safety pedal, left-foot switch

4

S26

Switch

Travel direction selector, changing

2

S27

Switch

Travel direction selector, driving in fork direction, foot

4

S28

Switch

Travel direction selector, switching

5

S29

Switch

Travel direction selector, driving in steer wheel direction, foot

4

S31

Switch

Speed reduction, driving

S32

Switch

Lift height limit

S33

Switch

Lift height limit, by coupling

3

S39

Switch

Extra hydraulic function 2, hydraulics

2

S44

Switch

Option cab tilt , manual lowering

3

S45

Switch

Reference height

7

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

16 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

Symbol Designation

Function

Diagram

S46

Inductive sensor

Lowering lift/lower

6

S55

Inductive sensor

Extending mast, low speed

6

S56

Inductive sensor

Retracting mast, low speed

6

S64

Inductive sensor

Drive motor speed

1

S65

Inductive sensor

Steer wheel sensor, 180°

1

S66

Inductive sensor

Steer wheel sensor, channel A

1

S67

Inductive sensor

Steer wheel sensor, channel B

1

S89

Switch

Seat breaker

5

SA1

Switch

Carbon brush indicator, drive/ pump motor (-)

SA2

Switch

Carbon brush indicator, drive/ pump motor (+)

U1

Tachometer

Steering sensor

2

U10

Pulse sensor

Height meter

7

V12

Diode

Fan, electric

1

X8

Connection

7

X11

Connection

2

X14

Connection

1

X15

Connection

1

X16

Connection

6

X17

Connection

6

X18

Connection

6

X19

Connection

6

X20

Connection

1

X21

Connection

1

X22

Connection

1

X23

Connection

1

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

17 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

Symbol Designation

C-code

301-307,400

Function

Diagram

X24

Connection

1

X25

Connection

5

X27

Connection

1

X28

Connection

7

X29

Connection

6

X30

Connection

1

X31

Connection

1

X32

Connection

1

X33

Connection

1

X34

Connection

1

X50

Connection

Y1

Magnet valve

Parking brake

1

Y10/2

Magnet valve

Lifting of forks

6

Y10/3

Magnet valve

Proportional valve, lowering of forks

6

Y12

Magnet valve

Retracting mast

6

Y13

Magnet valve

Extending mast

6

Y14

Magnet valve

Tilting of forks, down

6

Y15

Magnet valve

Tilting of forks, up

6

Y16

Magnet valve

Extra function 1-1A

6/8

Y17

Magnet valve

Extra function 1-1B

6/8

Y18

Magnet valve

Extra function 2-2A

Y19

Magnet valve

Extra function 2-2B

Y20

Magnet valve

Cab tilt, up

1

Y21

Magnet valve

Cab tilt, down

1

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

18 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.14. Diagram 1 X32 X33

X34 X30 K13

K11

X31

R1 Y1

S20

A5

M12

V12 F50

F51 A1

X24 X23 X22 X21 M6 X20 X15 X14 M11

A2

K10

F3 F1

M1 M3

S66 S67 S65

S64

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

X27

Y20

English

Y21

M10

H1

19 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.15. Diagram 2

A7 R11 R12 U1

R14

R13

S18

S26 X11

S10

S39

2.16. Diagram 3

A6

S44

S17

S21 © BT Products AB

Service Manual

S33

1997-01-21

English

20 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.17. Diagram 4

2.18. Diagram 5 S89

S28 X25

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

21 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.19. Diagram 6 X19

X18

X16

X17 X29

S46 S55 S56 Y13 Y14 Y17

Y16

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

Y15

Y12

1997-01-21

Y10

English

22 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.20. Diagram 7

S 45

U 10

X28 A8

X8

2.21. Diagram 8 Y17

X50 Y16

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

23 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Description of function RR B/E1-B/E8 The logic card on RR holds the microprocessor which senses switches, steering voltage, etc. and gives instructions to the external electronics, ors and valves etc. To hold the preprogrammed information in the electronic unit when the battery is disconnected, the unit receives its power from an internal battery. Any faults ed by the microprocessor are shown on the display. The error codes are explained in connection with the electronic card. The electronic card’s inputs and outputs are marked with the connection number and can easily be connected/disconnected using the ors. The inputs and outputs, which have two fixed positions, have LEDs as indicators, green for input and red for output. The description follows the operating sequence. For each operation a LED pattern is shown on the electronic card. A detailed description of the main components can be found in each chapter. The tables plus the following information show which diodes should be lit: Outputs which are not standard to the truck but which are included as optional extras are active on the card. If, for example, you have a B1, diodes 810 and 811 for cabin lift and Cabin lowering will be lit.

Signal name

Diode number

The name given to the input/ output on the card according to the circuit diagram

The diode showing which input/output is active on the card

When the display shows 304/901 for example, the first number is the input and the second is the output

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

24 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.1. Ignition key in the 0 position When the battery is connected to the truck via the charger plug the electronic card (A5) is fed with 48 V current and the LEDs are lit according to the table.

Signal name

Diode number POWER

© BT Products AB

+48 V POWER STEERING

1001

STEER WHEEL ANGLE

410/411

+48 V

908

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

25 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.2. Ignition key in 1 position The truck receives voltage when the operator turns the key to the 1 position. The driver must stand on the safety pedal to be able to use the travel direction selector and hydraulics. The voltage flows through the control fuse (F50), ignition lock (S17) and the emergency stop /S21) to the electronic card (A5), the transistor regulator (A1 and A2) and the height electronics (A7 and A8). The transistor regulator for the drive motor (A1) checks that the internal safety function works and makes the main or (K10) which provides voltage to the drive and pump motors as well as information to A5. The electronic card (A5) starts communications with the height electronics (A7 and A8). The stabilised voltage (+12 V) comes from A5 to potentiometer (R1) in the speed control and the hydraulic control (R11R14). A5 checks that the voltage from the hydraulic control is 1-11 V and sends control pulses to the tachometer (U1) and the control motor (M6). If the seat has a built-in heater, voltage will also be sent to the thermostat and the seat warmer (E10). All lamps on the display come on to show the lamps in normal mode: time, running time, battery status, any error codes and the software’s version number. The time the truck has the key in position 1 is measured and stored in the electronic unit.

Signal name

Diode number POWER STEER PWR STEER OK

© BT Products AB

SEAT SWITCH

403

+48 V SUPPLY OUTPUTS

909

LEFT FOOT SWITCH

309

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

26 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.3. Selection of travel direction There are three ways of selecting the direction of travel: With the steering console When control (S26) is pressed down the voltage is sent from the switch to A5. If the control is held down for at least three seconds the truck will travel at creep speed. With the left-hand handle When control (S28) is pressed the voltage goes from the switch to A5 which results in the truck changing travel direction. This control can only be used to change the direction of travel after the choice has been made on the steering console. It is not possible to activate the creep speed function with this control. With the speed control When the right-foot pedal (in direction of forks) is pressed the voltage goes from the switch (S27) to A5. The truck changes direction by pressing the left-foot pedal. The pedals can not be used to activate the creep speed function. The display shows the direction of travel.

Signal name


© BT Products AB

FORK DIRECTION, CREEP

303

STEER WHEEL DIRECTION, CREEP

304

FORK DIRECTION

305

STEER WHEEL DIRECTION

306

CHANGE DIRECTION

311

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

27 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.4. Driving When the switch (S10), which releases the parking brake is pressed the voltage goes to A5. The pump motor (M3) is activated and oil goes via valve (Y1) to the parking brake cylinder. The cylinder compresses the return spring, the wire slackens and the brake shoes release the brake drum. When the cylinder is in the outermost position the switch (S20) is active and voltage goes to A5 which stops the pump motor (M3). If the safety switch (S23) is not active when the parking brake is released a buzzer is sounded from the display. If the operator presses the speed control when the key is turned to position 1 the control must be returned to the neutral position before the truck can be driven. When the speed control is pressed down the potentiometer (R1) is activated and the selected travel direction or receives voltage from A5 and makes. The more the speed control is pressed down the greater the voltage that flows from R1 to A5. A1 governs the drive motor’s speed by means of the information from A5. The current flows through the fuse (F1), M1’s rotor, K11/K13, M1’s series windings to A1’s transistor connection (M). If the switch for speed reduction (S31) is active so that there is voltage on A5’s input, the preprogrammed max. speed will apply. The speed is measured with the help of a sensor (S64) which measures the speed of the drive motor. If the travel direction control on the steering console is pressed down for at least three seconds the truck will travel at creep speed. If the driver leaves the seat for more than three seconds the voltage from A5 to Y1 is discontinued and the parking brake is activated. The drive motor’s running time is measured and recorded in the electronic unit.

Signal name


© BT Products AB

PARKING BRAKE, RELEASING MODE

307

PARKING BRAKE, DRIVE MODE

308

PARKING BRAKE

905

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

28 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.5. Steering When the steering is turned the voltage goes from the tachometer (U1) to A5 which progressively supplies current to the steering motor (M6). The result of this is that the faster steering movement the quicker the steering motor rotates. This progressivity also means that the higher the driving speed, the lower the steering speed. The speed is measured with the help of sensor (S64) which measures the speed of the drive motor. When the steering is turned the steering wheel sensor (S65) is activated and voltage flows to A5. The opposite travel direction is shown on the display. The electronics automatically show the correct travel direction through switch (S65) giving a signal during 180° of the 360 possible. The (S 65) must one of the reference points so that the electronics knows the direction of the steering wheel and shows the travel direction. The function is initiated by turning the steering. This must be done at the first start and after servicing.

Signal name


STEER WHEEL REFERENCE 180 DEGREES

409

3.6. Steering wheel indicator (optional) When the steering is turned (S66 and S67) signal to A5 which shows the travel direction on the display. The sensor (S65) must one of the reference points so that the electronics knows the direction of the steering wheel and shows the travel direction. The function is initiated by turning the steering. This must be done at first start and after servicing. When the travel direction is changed by means of the switch the arrows change on the display.

Signal name


STEER WHEEL ANGLE © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

410, 411 English

29 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.7. Braking There are three ways to brake: Motor brake (electric) When the operator changes the travel direction by means of the switch the travel direction ors (K11 and K13) switch. The electronic card (A5) receives information from A1 that motor braking is taking place and changes the regulation of A1. The drive motor functions during braking as a generator and current goes through the brake diode to the transistor regulator’s connection (A). Foot brake When the operator presses the brake pedal the main brake cylinder is activated and the pressure increases in the brake cylinder on the drive motor which presses the brake shoes against the brake drum. On trucks with arm brakes these will receive the same increase in pressure and assist in stopping the truck. Parking brake When switch (S10) is pressed down so that both connections to A5 are without voltage, valve (Y1) opens and drains the oil from the parking brake cylinder with the help of the return spring. The return spring pulls the brake wire which press the brake shoes against the brake drum. Switch (S20) changes position and the parking symbol appears on the display.

Signal name


© BT Products AB

FORK DIRECTION

303/902

STEER WHEEL DIRECTION

304/901

PARKING BRAKE RELEASING MODE

307

PARKING BRAKE DRIVE MODE

308

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

30 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.8. Fork lift When the operator activates the potentiometer (R11) A5 receives a voltage on the input, the proportional valve (Y10) opens and sends a signal to transistor regulator (A1). The pump motor (M3) starts and gives oil to the lift cylinders. If the battery guard measures a remaining capacity of 20% or lower in the battery the lift speed is reduced. The lift speed is reduced during the change over from free lift to main lift.

Signal name

Diode number

FORKLIFT

801

3.9. Max. height switch (optional) When the forks reach the height switch (S32) and A5 receives a signal, the lift will be stopped. If the forks are to be lifted above this height the switch (S33) should be pressed down, which gives a signal to A5 and the lift continues. The start must take place within five seconds.

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

501

3.10. Pulse counter (optional) When the forks reach the main lift zone A5 receives a signal from switch (S45) to start counting pulses from transmitter (U10). The forks stop when the preprogrammed height is reached. If the forks are to be raised above this height switch (S33) must be pressed down which sends a signal to A5 and the lift can continue. The start must take place within five seconds.

© BT Products AB

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

501

HEIGHT COUNTER

502

HEIGHT REFERENCE

503

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

31 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.11. Fork lowering When the operator activates the potentiometer (R11) voltage goes to A5 which opens the proportional valve (Y10) and the operator can lower the forks at a variable speed. If the truck is fitted with a pulse counter, the lowering speed is reduced during change over from main lift to free lift.

Signal name

Diode number

FORK LOWER

904

3.12. Mast out/in When the operator activates the potentiometer (R12) voltage goes to A5 which opens proportional valve (Y12/Y13) and sends a signal to transistor regulator (A1). The pump motor (M3) starts and gives oil to the reach cylinder. Before the reach carriage reaches the end position transmitters (S55 and S56) are activated and a signal goes to A5 and A2. The pump motor speed is reduced.

Signal name

Diode number

REACH CARRIAGE, LOW SPEED OUT

407

REACH CARRIAGE, LOW SPEED IN

408

REACH CARRIAGE IN

802

REACH CARRIAGE OUT

803

3.13. Fork tilt up/down When the operator activates the potentiometer (R13) voltage goes to A5 which opens proportional valve (Y14/Y15) and sends a signal to transistor regulator (A1). The pump motor (M3) starts and gives oil to the tilt cylinder.

© BT Products AB

Signal name

Diode number

TILT DOWN

804

TILT UP

805

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

32 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

3.14. Hydraulic functions 4 and 5 When the operator activates the potentiometer (R14) voltage goes to A5 which opens proportional valve (Y16/Y17) and sends a signal to transistor regulator (A1). The pump motor (M3) starts and gives oil to the extra function. On trucks with a fifth function there is a change over between switch (S39) and indicator lamp (39) lights up when in use. When the operator presses switch (S39) voltage goes to A5 which lights up the lamp and gives voltage to the proportional valves (Y18 and Y19) and the fifth function’s cylinder receives oil.

Signal name

Diode number

TILT DOWN

804

TILT UP

805

SPARE 1A

806

SPARE 1B

807

3.15. Cabin tilt The operator selects the function by pressing down switch (S44) which sends a signal to A5 and lamp (44) is lit. When the forks are raised to the main lift zone switch (S45) makes and a signal is sent to A5. Proportional valve (Y20) receives voltage from A5 and the cabin tilts. The potentiometer R11 must be activated more than 50%. The cab can be tilted up to approx. 15 degrees. If the truck is fitted with a pulse counter (U10), A5 will receive information on the position of the forks. The cabin will begin to tilt when the programmed height has been reached. When the forks have been lowered and then raised once more to the programmed height or return to the free lift zone, the cabin will be tilted back by A5signalling proportional valve (Y21) to open. Even when lowering, the potentiometer must be activated more than 50%. As soon as the operator releases the potentiometer both tilting and fork lifting / lowering stop.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

33 (34)

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

The cabin can be lowered manually by the operator pressing switch (S44). A5 receives voltage and holds proportional valve (Y21) open as long as the switch is pressed down.

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

501

HEIGHT REFERENCE

503

CABIN LOWERING MANUAL

509

CABIN LIFT

810

CABIN LOWERING

811

3.16. Height indication The measurement starts in the main lift zone when the reference switch (S45) is activated and gives a signal to A5.The pulse sensor (U10) sends pulses to A5 which starts by showing the programmed free lift height on the display (A8).

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

501

HEIGHT COUNTER

502

HEIGHT REFERENCE

503

3.17. Height selection Measurement begins in the main lift zone when the reference switch (S45) is activated and sends a signal to A5. The pulse sensor (U10) sends pulses to A5 which starts by showing the programmed free lift height on the displays (A7 and A8). The forks stop at the first programmed height when A5, via the pulse sensor (U10), has reached the right height. The forks are stopped by A5 which regulates the speed of the pump motor with A2 and valves for lifting/lowering of the forks. The operator picks up/puts down loads manually. When the operator once again activates the potentiometer for lifting/lowering the forks continue to the next programmed level.

© BT Products AB

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

501

HEIGHT COUNTER

502

HEIGHT REFERENCE

503

Service Manual

1997-01-21

English

34 (34)

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S5 5000 Electrical system

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

Electrical system Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

1 (40)

F-code

Section

RT S5 Electrical system Version no

001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

1 General 1.1 Electrical

2 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

2 Symbols and electrical diagrams 2.1 List of symbols Symbol

Description

Symbol

Description

Battery

© BT Industries AB

Brake coil, normally released

Brake coil, normally engaged

Switch, normally open

Switch, normally closed

Push-button switch normally open

Push-button switch, normally closed

Switch non locking, normally open

Switch non locking, normally closed

Push-button switch locking, normally open

Emergency switch

Key switch, normally open

Push-button switch, locking and non locking

Magnet proximity switch, normally open

Magnet proximity switch, normally closed

Pressure sensor switch, normally open

Pressure sensor switch, normally closed

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (40)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

Symbol

5000

T-code

401-414

Description

Symbol

Description

Capacitive sensor, normally open

Capacitive sensor, normally closed

Inductive sensor, normally open

Inductive sensor, normally closed

Pulse sensor

Seat warmer with thermostat

Temperature sensor

Motor, general

D.C. series motor, armature winding

D.C. series motor

Motor, permanent magnet

Three phase motor, (AC)

4 (40)

Series winding

Shunt winding

Transducer, AC/DC

Transducer, DC/DC

Variable resistor (potentiometer)

Fixed resistor

or

Horn

Lamp

Valve

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

Symbol

© BT Industries AB

Description

Symbol

C-code

401-414

Description

Fuse

Diode

Zener diode

Light emitting diode (LED)

, multi polar

Capacitor

Measuring cable

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

5 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

2.2 Electrical diagram 1/11

6 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414


© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

7 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


8 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414


© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

9 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


10 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414


© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

11 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


12 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414


© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

13 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


14 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414


© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

15 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


16 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

2.13 List of components

© BT Industries AB

Symbol Designation - Function

Diagram

A1

Frequency converter, M1

5

A2

Frequency converter, M3

5

A5

Electronic card

5

A6

Display

1

A7

Height selector

2

A8

Height indication display

8

B1

Temperature sensor, M1

5

B2

Temperature sensor, M3

5

C1

Capacitor – noise suppression, H

5

E10

Seat warmer

4

E3, E4

Working light

8

F1

Fuse – drive motor, 125/160 A

5

F3

Fuse – pump motor, 200/250/300 A 5

F60

Fuse – control current for A5 card, 10 A

5

F61

Fuse – steering motor, 30 A

5

F62

Fuse – control current for K10, 10 A

5

F63

Fuse – control current for extra equipment, 10/16 A

5

G1

Battery 48 V

8

H1

Horn

5

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

17 (40)

F-code

Section


001

18 (40)

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


Diagram

K10

Main or

5

M1

Drive motor

5

M3

Pump motor

5

M6

Steering motor

5

M10

Fan for pump motor

5

M12

Fan for electrical

5

R1

Potentiometer, driving

5

R2

Potentiometer, brake

5

R11

Potentiometer, fork lift/fork lowering 2

R12

Potentiometer, reach carriage

2

R13

Potentiometer, tilt

2

R14

Potentiometer, extra hydraulic function

2

R15

Potentiometer, extra hydraulic function

2

R100

Resistance, service key

8

R101

Resistance, service key

5

R102

Resistance, emergency lowering, forks

5

S1

Micro switch, operator number/pro- 1 gramming

S2

Micro switch, operator number/ stepping up

1

S3

Micro switch, operator number/ stepping down

1

S17

Key switch

1

S18

Micro switch, horn

2

S21

Emergency switch

1

S23

Safety switch, left foot pedal

3

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

© BT Industries AB

C-code

401-414


Diagram

S26

Micro switch, travel direction with crawl speed

2

S27

Micro switch, travel direction (foot), fork direction

3

S28

Micro switch, travel direction (hand)

4

S29

Micro switch travel direction (foot), steering wheel direction

3

S31

Micro switch, speed reduction, driv- 8 ing

S32

Micro switch, max lifting height

8

S33

Micro switch, max lifting height, by coupling

1

S44

Micro switch, cab tilt

1

S45

Micro switch, height indication

7

S46

Magnet switch, lowering between free lift and main lift

7

S61

Micro switch, load weight

2

S65

Pulse sensor, steer wheel centre

5

S66

Pulse sensor, steer wheel direction 5

S89

Micro switch, seat

4

S99

Micro switch, working light

1

S131

Micro switch, release parking brake 5

S132

Micro switch, emergency lowering, forks

5

S133

Micro switch, emergency retraction of mast

5

S134

Micro switch, emergency lowering of cab

5

U1

Tachometer, steering

2

U10

Pulse sensor, height meter

7

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

19 (40)

F-code

Section


001

20 (40)

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414


Diagram

U11

Pulse sensor, drive motor

5

U12

Pulse sensor, pump motor

5

X1

8

X8

8

X11

2

X12

5

X13

5

X14

5

X15

5

X16

6

X17

6

X18

5

X19

5

X20

5

X21

5

X23

5

X24

5

X25

4

X26

5

X27

5

X28

7

X29

6

X30

5

X31

5

X32

5

X33

5

X34

5

X35

5

X36

5

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

© BT Industries AB

C-code

401-414


Diagram

X37

5

X38

5

X39

8

X40

8

X41

8

X42

5

X43

6

X45

1

X50

8

X52

6

Y1

Magnet, parking brake

5

Y5

Magnet, arm brake

8

Y6

Magnet, arm brake

8

Y10

Magnet valve, lifting/lowering

6

Y12

Magnet valve, reach carriage in

6

Y13

Magnet valve, reach carriage out

6

Y14

Magnet valve, tilt down

6

Y15

Magnet valve, tilt up

6

Y16

Magnet valve, extra hydraulic func- 6 tion 1A

Y17

Magnet valve, extra hydraulic func- 6 tion 1B

Y18

Magnet valve, extra hydraulic func- 6 tion 2A

Y19

Magnet valve, extra hydraulic func- 6 tion 2B

Y20

Magnet valve, cab tilt up

5

Y21

Magnet valve, cab tilt down

5

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

21 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

2.14 Diagram 1

A6

S99 S44 S33

S1 S2 S3

S17 S21 X45

2.15 Diagram 2 R15 R14

A7 R13 R12 R11 S18 S61 U1

S26

X11

22 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

2.16 Diagram 3 S27 S29

S23

2.17 Diagram 4

S89 E10 X25 S28

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

23 (40)

F-code

Section


C-code

5000

T-code

001

401-414

2.18 Diagram 5 X24

X23 X21 X20

S134 S133 S132

R102

S131 X32

X33 X34

X38 X37 X15

X30

X14

X42

X31

F63 F62 F61 F60 A5

M12

F1 A1

F3 A2

R101 K10 R1 X19 R2 X36

C1 H1 M10 X35

Y20

M3 U12 B2

RR E1-8 Y21 X18 S66 S65

24 (40)

M6

M1 Y1 B1 U11

Service Manual

X12 X27

X26 X13

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

2.19 Diagram 6 X16 X17 X29 X43

Y13

X52

Y14

Y18

Y17 Y19

Y16

Y15

Y12

Y10

2.20 Diagram 7

S45 U10 X28

S46

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

25 (40)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

5000

T-code

401-414

2.21 Diagram 8 E4

E3

X8 A8 X41 R100 X39

Y6 X40

S31 S32

G1

X50 X1 Y16 Y17

26 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

Y5

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

3 Description of function The electronic card on RR AC/ACi holds the microprocessor which senses switches, steering voltage, etc. and gives instructions to the external electronics, ors and valves etc. To hold the preprogrammed information in the electronic unit when the battery is disconnected, the unit receives its power from an internal battery. Any faults ed by the microprocessor are shown on the display. The error codes are explained in connection with the electronic card. The electronic card’s inputs and outputs are marked with the connection number and can easily be connected/disconnected using the ors. The inputs and outputs, which have two fixed positions, have LEDs as indicators, green for input and red for output, the rest are yellow.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

The name given to the input/ output on the card according to the circuit diagram

The diode showing which input/output is active on the card

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

27 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.1 Ignition key in the 0 position When the battery is connected to the truck via the charger plug the electronic card (A5) is fed with 48 V current and the LEDs are lit according to the table. LEDs 210, 211, 301 and 302 light depending on whether the sensor is activated or not. Voltage +7.35 V goes from A5 to potentiometer R1 in the accelerator, brake control R2 and hydraulic controls R11-R15.

Signal name

Diode number

STEER WHEEL ANGLE

210, 211

HEIGHT COUNTER

301, 302

+48 V

805 STEER PWR POWER OK +48 V STEER

3.2 Ignition key in 1 position The truck receives voltage when the operator turns the key to the 1 position. In order to use the travel direction selector and the hydraulics, the driver must be seated in the truck so that the switch S89 closes. Voltage goes through the control fuse F60, ignition switch S17 and emergency switch S21 to electronic card A5, frequency converters A1 and A2, height electronics A7 and A8 plus fan M10 which then starts. Electronic card A5 checks that the internal safety function works and closes the main or K10 which provides voltage to the drive and pump motors. The electronic card A5 begins communicating with A7 and A8 and sends voltage 32 V to fan M12 which then rotates at half speed. A5 checks that the voltage from the potentiometers is 3.65 V and sends check pulses to tachometer U1 and steering motor M6. If the seat has a built in warmer, voltage +48 V is also sent to the thermostat and seat warmer E10. The display comes on and presents the software’s version number and then switches to its normal mode: time, running time, battery status and any error codes. The time the truck has the key in position 1 is measured and stored in the electronic unit.

28 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

The LEDs will light according to the table. • No. 706–711 comes on if the valves are not fitted to the truck. • No. 110, 203 and 301 come on if the switches are actuated. LEDs on the frequency converter will light. .

Signal name

Diode number

LEFT FOOT SWITCH

110

SEAT SWITCH

203

CABIN LIFT

301

SPARE 1A, 1B

706, 707

SPARE 2A, 2B

708, 709

CABIN LIFT

710

CABIN LOWER

711

ARM BRAKE

801 (dimly lit)

FORK LOWER

803 (dimly lit)

MAIN OR

804 +48 V KEY +48 V ESO +48 V_SR

3.3 Selection of travel direction There are three ways to select the travel direction. 3.3.1 With the steering console When control S26 is pressed down the voltage is sent from the switch to A5. If the control is held down for at least three seconds the truck will travel at creep speed.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

DRIVE, FORK DIRECTION

104

DRIVE, STEER WHEEL DIRECTION

105

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

29 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.3.2 With the left-hand handle When control S28 is pressed the voltage goes from the switch to A5 which results in the truck changing travel direction. This control can only be used to change the direction of travel after the choice has been made on the steering console. It is not possible to activate the creep speed function with this control.

Signal name

Diode number

DRIVE, CHANGE DIRECTION

111

3.3.3 With the speed control When the right-hand pedal (in direction of forks) is pressed the voltage goes from the switch S27 to A5. The truck changes direction by pressing the left-foot pedal. The pedals can not be used to activate the creep speed function.

Signal name

Diode number

DRIVE, FORK DIRECTION

106

DRIVE, STEER WHEEL DIRECTION

107

The display shows the direction of travel.

3.4 Driving When the accelerator R1 is activated the drive motor brake will be released. If the safety switch S23 is not active when the parking brake is released a buzzer is sounded from the display. If the operator presses the speed control when the key is turned to position 1 the control must be returned to the neutral position before the truck can be driven. When the accelerator pedal is pressed the potentiometer R1 is activated and the more the pedal is pressed the lower the voltage which is sent from R1 to A5. The voltage decreases from 3.7 to 1.7 V which gives 0–100% speed. A1 regulates the drive motor’s revolutions with the help of information from A5. Voltage goes via A1’s fuse F1 and is converted to 3 phase AC which is then sent to M1. If the switch for speed reduction S31 is active so that there is voltage on A5’s input, the preprogrammed max. speed will apply. The speed is measured on the drive motor by means of sensor U11. 30 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

If the travel direction control on the steering console is pressed down for at least three seconds the truck will travel at creep speed. If the driver leaves the seat for more than three seconds the voltage from A5 to Y1 is discontinued and the parking brake is activated. The drive motor’s running time is measured and recorded in the electronic unit.

Signal name

Diode number

PARKING BRAKE

802

3.5 Steering When the steering wheel is turned the voltage goes from the tachometer (U1) to A5 which progressively supplies current to the steering motor (M6). The result of this is that the faster steering movement the quicker the steering motor rotates. This progressivity also means that the higher the driving speed, the lower the steering speed. The speed is measured on the drive motor by means of sensor U11. When the steering is turned the steering wheel sensor S65 is activated and voltage flows to A5. The opposite travel direction is shown on the display. The electronics automatically show the correct travel direction through switch S65 giving a signal during 180° of the 360 possible. The S65 mus t one of the reference points so that the electronics knows the direction of the steering wheel and shows the travel direction. The function is initiated by turning the steering. This must be done at the first start and after servicing. LEDs 209, 210 and 211 light depending on whether the sensor is activated or not.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

STEER WHEEL REF. 180°

209

STEER WHEEL ANGLE A

210

STEER WHEEL ANGLE B

211

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

31 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.6 Steering wheel indicator When the steering wheel is turned, S66 signals to A5 which shows the travel direction on the display. The sensor S65 must one of the reference points so that the electronics knows the direction of the steering wheel and shows the travel direction. The function is initiated by turning the steering. This must be done at first start and after servicing. When the travel direction is changed by means of the switch the arrows change on the display. LEDs 209, 210 and 211 light depending on whether the sensor is activated or not.

Signal name

Diode number

STEER WHEEL REF. 180°

209

STEER WHEEL ANGLE A

210

STEER WHEEL ANGLE B

211

3.7 Braking Braking can be done in different ways. 3.7.1 Auto plug braking When the operator releases the accelerator the drive motor will automatically slow the truck to the desired speed. The auto plug braking function and braking force can be selected using parameters. 3.7.2 Motor brake (electric) When the operator changes travel direction with the use of the controls, the drive motor acts as a generator/brake and feeds the voltage back to the battery. The braking force is determined with the help of the accelerator pedal. The electronic card A5 receives information from A1 as to whether braking has occurred and regulates A1.

32 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

3.7.3 Foot brake When the operator presses the brake pedal the potentiometer R2 is activated. The voltage increases from 1.7 V to 4.1 V which gives 0–100% braking force. When the pedal is pressed up to half way the truck is slowed down by the drive motor. On trucks with arm brakes, these will begin to slow the truck down further as the brake pedal is pressed further down. When the brake pedal is fully depressed the parking brake will also be activated. LED 801 will be dimly lit at first and fully lit when full braking force is reached.

Signal name

Diode number

ARM BRAKE

801

3.7.4 Parking brake If the truck is standing still when the brake pedal is pressed the parking brake will be activated. If the driver leaves the seat for more than three seconds the voltage from A5 to Y1 is discontinued and the parking brake is activated.

3.8 Fork lift When the operator activates the potentiometer R11 A5 receives a voltage 3,7–6,6 V on the input, the proportional valve Y10 opens and sends a signal to transistor regulator A2. The pump motor M3 starts and gives oil to the lift cylinders. If the battery guard measures a remaining capacity of 20% or lower in the battery the lift speed is reduced. The lift speed is reduced during the change over from free lift to main lift. The speed of M3 is measured by sensor U12.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

FORKLIFT

701

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

33 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.9 Maximum height Truck with maximum height switch. When the forks reach the height switch S32 and A5 receives a signal, the lift will be stopped. If the forks are to be lifted above this height the switch S33 should be pressed down, which gives a signal to A5 and the lift continues. The start must take place within fifteen seconds.

Signal name

Diode number

LIFT LIMIT SPECIAL HEIGHT

301

OVERRIDE

205

3.10 Maximum height Truck with pulse counter. When the forks reach the main lift zone A5 receives a signal from switch S45 to start counting pulses from transmitter U10. The forks will stop when the preprogrammed heights (2 heights) are reached. If the forks are to be lifted above this height, switch S33 must be pressed which sends a signal to A5 and the lift continues. The start must take place within fifteen seconds. LEDs 301, 302 and 303 light depending on whether the sensor is activated or not.

34 (40)

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

301

HEIGHT COUNTER

302

HEIGHT REFERENCE

303

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

3.11 Fork lowering When the operator activates the potentiometer R11 voltage goes 3.7–0.66 V to A5 which opens the proportional valve Y10 and the operator can lower the forks at a variable speed. If the truck is fitted with a pulse counter, the lifting speed is reduced during change over from main lift to free lift. The LED is dimly lit in neutral and increases in strength to be fully lit when lowering begins. Without the transmitter the speed will be reduced when S46 is activated.

Signal name

Diode number

FORK LOWER

803

3.12 Mast out/in When the operator activates the hydraulic lever R12 voltage (out = 3.7–0.77 V or in = 3.7–6.6 V) goes to A5 which opens the directional valve Y12/Y13 and sends a signal to the frequency converter A1. The pump motor M3 starts and sends oil to the reach cylinder. The speed of the pump motor is reduced before the mast reaches the end position.

Signal name

Diode number

REACH CARRIAGE IN

702

REACH CARRIAGE OUT

703

3.13 Fork tilt up/down When the operator activates the hydraulic lever R13 voltage (up = 3.7–6.6 V or down = 3.7–0.66 V) goes to A5 which opens the directional valve Y14/Y15 and sends a signal to the frequency converter A1. The pump motor M3 starts and gives oil to the tilt cylinder.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

TILT DOWN

704

TILT UP

705

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

35 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.14 Hydraulic function 4 When the operator activates the hydraulic lever R14 voltage (3.7–6.7 V or 3.7–0.66 V) goes to A5 which opens the directional valve Y16/Y17 and sends a signal to the frequency converter A1. The pump motor M3 starts and gives oil to the extra function.

Signal name

Diode number

SPARE 1A

706

SPARE 1B

707

3.15 Hydraulic function 5 When the operator activates the hydraulic lever R15 voltage (3.7–6.7 V or 3.7–0.66 V) goes to A5 which opens the directional valve Y16/Y17 and sends a signal to the frequency converter A1. The pump motor M3 starts and gives oil to the extra function.

Signal name

Diode number

SPARE 2A

708

SPARE 2B

709

3.16 Cabin tilt The operator selects the function by pressing down switch S44 which sends a signal to A5 and lamp 44 is lit. When the forks are raised to the main lift zone switch S45 makes and a signal is sent to A5. Proportional valve Y20 receives voltage from A5 and the cabin tilts. The potentiometer must be activated more than 50%. The cab can be tilted up to approx. 15 degrees. If the truck is fitted with a pulse counter U10, A5 will receive information on the position of the forks. The cabin will begin to tilt when the programmed height has been reached. When the forks have been lowered and then raised once more to the programmed height or return to the free lift zone, the cabin will be tilted back by A5 signalling proportional valve Y21 to open. Even when lowering, the potentiometer must be activated more than 50%.

36 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

As soon as the operator releases the potentiometer both tilting and fork lifting/lowering stop. The cabin can be lowered manually by the operator pressing switch S44. A5 receives voltage and holds proportional valve Y21 open as long as the switch is pressed down.

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

301

HEIGHT REFERENCE

302

CABIN LOWERING MANUAL

304

CABIN LIFT

305

CABIN LIFT

710

CABIN LOWERING

711

3.17 Height indication The measurement starts in the main lift zone when the reference switch S45 is activated and gives a signal to A5.The pulse sensor U10 sends pulses to A5 which starts by showing the programmed free lift height on the display A8.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

301

HEIGHT COUNTER

302

HEIGHT REFERENCE

303

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

37 (40)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

3.18 Height selection Measurement begins in the main lift zone when the reference switch (S45) is activated and sends a signal to A5. The pulse sensor (U10) sends pulses to A5 which starts by showing the programmed free lift height on the displays (A7 and A8). The forks stop at the first programmed height when A5, via the pulse sensor (U10), has reached the right height. The forks are stopped by A5 which regulates the speed of the pump motor with A2 and valves for lifting/lowering of the forks. The operator picks up/puts down loads manually. When the operator once again activates the potentiometer for lifting/lowering the forks continue to the next programmed level. See C-code 9000.

Signal name

Diode number

HEIGHT COUNTER

301

HEIGHT COUNTER

302

HEIGHT REFERENCE

303

3.19 Weight measurement • Place the load on the forks. • Lift the forks free from the ground. • Press the weight measurement button. • ---- will be shown in the “time” window. • Lift the load. The weight of the load will be shown on the display in increments of 50 kg with a tolerance of +- 25 kg. The display will automatically return to the running meter after 10 sec. Calibration, see C-code 5710.

38 (40)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

C-code

T-code

001

401-414

3.20 Operator - ID Logging in can be done in two different ways. 3.20.1 With pin code • Press one of the switches I, II, or III to select operator 1 to 3. 3.20.2 With pin code • Press switches I, II, and III the 4-digit combination (e.g. I, II, III and III) to select driver 1 to 10. To program operator combination, see C-code 5710.

© BT Industries AB

Signal name

Diode number

SETUP SELECT

101

SETUP UP

102

SETUP DOWN

103

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

39 (40)

F-code

Section


001

40 (40)

C-code

5000

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 5.0 5460 Transistor regulator

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

Transistor regulator Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General The truck is fitted with two transistor regulators. One which controls the hydraulics and one which controls the driving. Transistor regulator for driving on N/B/E1-N/B/E3/C PUB 48 280 CD 3 Transistor regulator for driving on B/E4-B/E8/C PUB 48 350 CD 3 Transistor regulator for hydraulics on N1-N3 and B/E1-B/E6/C PUB 48 400 CD 2 Transistor regulator for hydraulics on B/E7-B/E8/C PUB 48 500 CD 2

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-06

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 5.0 Transistor regulator Version no

001

C-code

5460

T-code

301-307,400

2. Motor circuit The transistor regulator has four terminals for the high current cables according to the table below.

Terminal number

Function

A

Brake diode to motor series field and armature

B-

Battery minus

B+

Battery plus

M

Minus connection to motor’s series field

3. or for control voltage Terminal number

Con.

Function

1

I

Supply voltage

2

I

Safety test

3

Not used

4

I

Common connection B-

5

I

Common connection B-

6

I

Minus for terminals 10 and 11

7

O

Safety signal for main or (48 V)

8

O

Electrical motor brake (48 V)

9

O

Stabilised voltage 13,5 V

10

I

Reference value 0 - 5 V

11

I

Current limit (0 - 5 V)

I = Input O = Output

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-02-06

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 5.0 5460 Transistor regulator

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

LED no.

Colour Function

1

Green

OK

2

Yellow

Over temperature/under temperature

3

Red

Fault in electronic power components

4

Red

Fault in reference value circuit

4. Safety check 4.1. Checking the safety circuit for the transistor regulator for driving This check applies to all BT-trucks fitted with transistor regulator type: PUB 48 280 CD 3 and PUB 48 350 CD 3. • Lift the truck by those points marked with lifting eye bolts. • Place s under the chassis, one on each side of the drive wheel. • Lower the truck onto the s. Warning! The truck can overturn. Risk of great personal injury and damage to property. Ensure the truck is stable and that the drive wheel does not have with the ground.

• Remove the arm rest. • Loosen the wing nuts holding the arm rest . • Remove the arm rest • Turn the ignition key so that the electronic card is voltage fed. • Connect a 0.7 mm² cable between the battery minus (B-) and the for the control current (pin number 2, see diagram) on the transistor regulator. The main or K10 should now release to indicate that the transistor regulator’s safety system functions. If K10 does not release, replace the entire transistor regulator. • Return the truck to it’s original condition after the check. • Reset the safety circuits by turning the ignition key to the 0 position.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-02-06

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 5.0 Transistor regulator Version no

001

4 (4)

C-code

5460

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1997-02-06

English

F-code

RT

Section

C-code

S5 5710 Electronic card/control card

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

Electronic card/control card Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

RX TX

1. General The electronic card for RR B/E1-B/E8 is equipped with green LEDs on the inputs from microswitches and sensors and red LEDs on the outputs to the ors and valves. The LEDs are lit when the signal is high.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

1 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S5 5710 Electronic card/control card Version no

001

T-code

301-307,400

I=Input O=output

2. Input/output signals Terminal number

LED no. Connection Function

Active

101

Display — Series (+)

42 V

102

Display — Series(-)

0V

103

Display — TX (+), transmit data

2.9 V

104

Display — TX (-), transmit data

0.9 V

105

Terminal number


Active

201 202

Height indicator/height preset — TX (-), transmit data

0.9 V

203

Height preset— RX (+), receive data

2.4 V

204

Height preset — RX (-), receive data

0V

205

Height indicator/height preset — TX (+), transmit data

2.9 V

2 (26)

LED no.

Colour

Function

TX

Yellow

Height indicator/height preset— TX, transmit data

RX

Yellow

Height preset — RX, receive data

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

Terminal number

LED no.

Connection Function

Active

301

301

I

Transistor regulator, safety signal

48 V

302

302

I

Drive motor, speedometer

0-8.2 V

303

303

I

Travel direction selector, fork direction, with creep speed

48 V

304

304

I

Travel direction selector, steer wheel direction, with creep speed

48 V

305

305

I

Travel direction selector, fork direction

48 V

306

306

I

Travel direction selector, steer wheel direction

48 V

307

307

I

Parking brake, released

48 V

308

308

I

Parking brake, released/applied

48 V

309

309

I

Safety pedal (left foot)

48 V

310

310

I

Electrical drive motor brake

48 V

311

311

I

Travel direction switching

48 V

Terminal number


Active

401

401

402

I

Hydraulic extra function 2

48 V

O

Hydraulic extra function 2

24 V

403

403

I

Seat switch

48 V

404

404

I

Parking brake, released

48 V

405

405

I

Lift height limit, by

48 V

406

406

I


48 V

407

407

I

Extending mast, low speed

48 V

408

408

I

Retracting mast, low speed

48 V

409

409

I

Steering wheel sensor, 180°

48 V

410

410

I

Steering wheel sensor, channel A

12 V

411

411

I

Steering wheel sensor, channel B

12 V

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

3 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

Terminal number

LED no.

Connection Function

Active

501

501

I

Lift height limiter, channel A

0-10 V

502

502

I

Height meter, channel B

0-10 V

503

503

I

Reference height sensor

48 V

504

504

I

Carbon brush indicator, drive motor (-)

48 V

505

505

I

Carbon brush indicator, drive motor (+) 48 V

506

506

I

Carbon brush indicator, pump motor (-) 48 V

507

507

I

Carbon brush indicator, pump motor (+)

48 V

509

509

I

Cab lowering, manual

48 V

510

510

I

Cab tilt, selected

48 V

O

Cab tilt, selected

24 V

508

511

Terminal number

Connection Function

Active

I

Potentiometer driving, reference value

1-11 V

603

I

Potentiometer fork movement, reference value

1-11 V

604

I

Potentiometer mast, extending/retracting, reference value

1-11 V

605

I

Potentiometer tilting of forks, reference value

1-11 V

606

I

Potentiometer extra hydraulic function, reference value

1-11 V

607

I

Minus for terminals 608 - 610

0V

608

I

Transistor regulator lift, temperature

0.9-2.2 V

609

I

Transistor regulator lift, voltage return supply

5-0 V

610

I

Transistor regulator lift, current return supply

0-0.7 V

611

I

Battery guard, voltage supply(-)

0V

601

LED no.

602

4 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

Terminal number

301-307,400


Active

701

I

Steering tachometer (+)

0-3.5 V

702

I

Steering tachometer (-)

0V

703

I

Battery guard, current supply (+)

704

I

Battery guard, current supply (-)

705

I

Battery guard, voltage supply (+)

48 V

706

O

Minus for terminals 707, 708

0V

707

O

Transistor regulator driving, reference value

0.5-5 V

708

O

Transistor regulator driving, current limit

0.5-5 V

709

O

Minus for terminals 710, 711

0V

710

O

Transistor regulator hydraulic, reference value

2-5 V

711

O

Transistor regulator hydraulic, current limit

0-5 V

Terminal number


Active

801

801

O

Valve, lifting of forks

0.5-48 V

802

802

O

Valve, retracting mast

0.5-48 V

803

803

O

Valve, extending mast

0.5-48 V

804

804

O

Valve, tilting forks down

0.5-48 V

805

805

O

Valve, tilting forks up

0.5-48 V

806

806

O

Valve, extra hydraulic function 1 A 0.5-48 V

807

807

O

Valve, extra hydraulic function 1 B 0.5-48 V

808

808

O

Valve, extra hydraulic function 2 A 0.5-48 V

809

809

O

Valve, extra hydraulic function 2 B 0.5-48 V

810

810

O

Valve, cab tilt up

0.5-48 V

811

811

O

Valve, cab tilt down

0.5-48 V

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

5 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

Terminal number

LED no.

Connection Function

Active

901

901

O

or, driving in direction of forks

48 V

902

902

O

or, driving in direction of steering wheel

48 V

O

Electrical motor brake

903 904

904

O

Valve, lift of forks

0.2-17 V

905

905

O

Valve, parking brake

0.8-48 V

908

908

I

Battery voltage, (+) 48 V

48 V

909

909

I


48 V

910

Potentiometer supply, (+) 12 V

12 V

911

Potentiometer supply, minus

0V

906 907

Terminal number

LED no.

Connection Function

Active

1001

301

I


48 V

1002

302

Battery voltage, minus

0V

1003

303

Steering motor(+)

24 V

1004

304

Steering motor, (-)

24 V

6 (26)

LED

Colour

Function

POWER

Green

Indicates that all voltage is fed to electronic card

STEER PWR

Green

Voltage fed to control electronics

STEER OK

Green

Steering OK

Switch

Function

SW 1

Switch to program parameters and error codes

SW 2


SW 3


Potentiometer

Function

Lower

Trimming of the proportional valve’s opening position Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

3. Display It is possible to look at the machine specific and program the clock for, e.g. summer or winter time. The truck cannot be driven with any functions while in the programming mode. Proceed as follows to look at the machine specific : • Remove the arm rest cushion • Remove the screw and lever that lock the steering • Remove the arm rest • Turn the ignition key so that the electronic card is voltage fed • Press button SW1 on the electronic card • Press SW1 once again to step to the next function The character window (C) will present the different functions: • Time • Warning and error codes • Parameters • Running time The address will be shown in the left-hand section and the value in the right-hand section for the “Warning/Error codes” and “Parameters”.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

7 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

4. Time When it is possible to program the clock the character window for hours will flash and after pressing SW1 the minutes will flash. • Change by stepping up using SW2 and stepping down using SW3 • Save the values and display the function by pressing SW1

Function

Value

Hours

09 = 9h

Minutes

35 = 35 min

When error codes are displayed in the character window (C) the character box (G) will light. When the parameters are displayed in character window (C) the character box (F) will light. However, it is not possible to reprogram the parameters in this mode. To change to the programming mode, see “Programming parameters”. Complete programming by turning the ignition key off and on once. Programming mode will quit if you do not press a key during a ten second period.

8 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

5. Warning codes A

B

C

A

1 1/2 0

J

Character

I H G F E

D

Error Warning

When an error has occurred a signal sounds and a code is displayed for ten seconds in the right-hand section of the character window (C). The error is also shown in the character box (G). If the error remains after 1 min. the warning and signal will be activated again for a two second period. This happens as long as the error is not rectified. The truck can still be driven with all functions as set out in the table. WARNING! Ignoring error indications. The safety of the truck is jeopardised. Always check the operation of the truck before use.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

9 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

5.1. Warning codes without ing Code Type of error no.

Probable cause

Effect on the truck

11

The steering servo electronics have overheated

Steering jamming

Lower speed when steering and driving

12

The steering angle sensor gives no signal when steering

Faulty steering angle sensor or broken cable

None

13

The height pulse sensor gives no signal when lowering the forks above the fork reference switch

Faulty pulse sensor or broken cable

None

14

The seat breaker is activated more than 20 minutes without the truck being touched

Faulty switch or broken cable

None

15

The safety switch is activated more than 20 minutes without the truck being touched

Faulty switch or broken cable

None

16

The carbon brushes on the pump motor have worn down to the min. length

Worn carbon brushes

None

17

The carbon brushes on the drive motor have worn down to the min. length

Worn carbon brushes

None

18

The battery in the logic box has reached it’s lowest voltage

The battery has too low voltage

Data stored in memory will be lost

21

The potentiometer for fork lift gives too high voltage when ignition is switched on

Faulty potentiometer or broken cable

Lifting/lowering of forks will stop

22

The potentiometer for tilting gives too high voltage when ignition is switched on


Tilting will stop

10 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

Code Type of error no.

Probable cause

Effect on the truck

23

The potentiometer for mast retracting/extending gives too high voltage when ignition is switched on


Retracting/extending will stop

24

The potentiometer for extra functions “1” and “2” gives too high voltage when ignition is switched on


Extra functions will stop

25

No power to the valve/or or a short circuit

Faulty valve/or or broken cable. See code number 50 - 65

Function stop depending on the cause of the fault

26

No power to the potentiometer for hydraulic functions

Faulty potentiometer or broken cable.See code number 90-93

Function stop depending on the cause of the fault

27

Incorrect voltage measurement from battery

Intermittent or broken cables

No effect on truck. Flashing battery indicator

5.2. Warning codes with ing Code Type of error no.


50

Valve Y20 for cab tilt, lift

60

Valve Y13 for mast’s extension

51

Valve Y20 for cab tilt, lower

61

Proportional Valve Y10 for fork lowering

52

Valve Y10 for fork lift

62

Valve Y1 for parking brake

53

Valve Y14 for fork lift, up

64

or K11 for driving in direction of forks

54

Valve Y14 for fork lift, down

65

or K13 for driving in direction of steering wheel

55

Valve for extra function ”1”

90

Potentiometer R11 for fork lift

56


91

Potentiometer R13 for tilt

57


92

Potentiometer R12 for retraction/extension of mast

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

11 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400



58


93

59

Valve Y12 mast’s retraction

Potentiometer R14 for extra function ”1” and ”2”

When the warning code is displayed it is automatically ed. Registration takes places in the first of the 80 possible positions and moves the previous error one step downward. With warning codes 50-62 the valve, or or cables are either broken or short circuited. With warning codes 90-93 the potentiometer or cables are broken. Only the actual function is disabled; other functions are not affected.

12 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

6. Error codes A

B

C

A

1 1/2 0

J

I H G F E

D

Character Error Error

When an error has occurred a buzzer sounds at the same time as an error code is displayed in the right-hand section of the character window (C). (The error is also shown in the character box (G) ). The buzzer sounds until the ignition is switched off and the voltage to the truck is cut. If the error remains when the ignition key is switched on again the code will be shown and the buzzer will sound again. The truck can still be used with the hydraulic functions listed in the table. When an error code is shown it is automatically ed in the error . (The meaning of the error is shown in the table). Registration takes places in the first of the 80 possible positions and moves the previous error one step downward. When the is shown in the character window the latest error is shown first with the error code. To see the date when the error occurred press SW3 once and to see the time press SW3 once again. To see more of the ed errors press SW2. WARNING! Ignoring error indications. The safety of the truck is jeopardised. Always check the operation of the truck before use.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

13 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

6.1. Error codes with ing Code no.

Type or error

Probable cause

102

Error signal from servo electronics

Faulty servo unit or the emergency stop has been activated

110

Error signal from parking brake cylinder’s microswitch

Faulty switch or broken cables

111

Parking brake cylinder’s microswitch gives a signal as released despite the valve being open

Faulty switch or broken cables

120

Fault in the electronic unit

Faulty electronic unit

121

Communication error between the electronic units on the card


122

Steering servo electronics too hot


123



125

Fault on steering generator

Faulty generator or broken cable

126

Fault on steering motor

Faulty motor or broken cable

127



130



131

Electronics do not start


132


Faulty electronic unit or broken cable

133



140



Effect on the truck All hydraulic functions except fork lowering are stopped.

14 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

7. Parameters The significance of the different parameters is shown in the table in section “Programming parameters”. To see the different parameters press SW1 or SW2.

8. Running time When the time meter reading is shown the character box (E) is illuminated. The time is shown as follows:

Character

Time Ignition time

Total movement time

Drive motor time

Pump motor time

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

15 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

9. Programming parameters Only applies to electronic card no. 142575-005 • Press SW1 on the electronic card while at the same time turning the ignition key • Step using SW2 (up) and SW3 (down) to the parameter you wish to change • Press SW1 (the character window flashes) • Change the value using SW2/SW3 • Press SW1 to accept the value (character window stops flashing) If you wish to change more parameters, step using SW2/SW3 to the parameter you wish to change and repeat from “Press SW1 (the character window flashes). NOTE! Truck handling. Modifying specific truck parameters will change the driving characteristics of the truck. Do not change any parameters without the necessary knowhow.

No. Parameter type

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks

01

Steering sensitivity

1-6

3

1 = Little sensitivity 5 = Great sensitivity 6 = no progressivity In steps of one

02

Steering wheel size

0.1

0

0 = Small wheel 1 = Large wheel

03

Drive motor, max. speed

%

10 - 100

100

Percentage of max. speed In steps of 5

04

Drive motor, speed reduction

%

10 - 100

100


05

Drive motor, acceleration

%

10 - 100

100

Percentage of max. acceleration In steps of 5

06

Mast’s retraction/extension, speed

%

10 - 100

80


07

Extra function 1, speed

%

10 - 100

20

Percentage of max. oil flow In steps of 5

16 (26)

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

No. Parameter type

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks

08

Extra function 2 speed

%

10 - 100

20


09

Connection of extra hydraulic function 1, current limit

%

0 - 100

0

0 = not connected > 0 = connected I steg om 5

10

Connection of extra function 2, current limit

%

0 - 100

0

0 = not connected > 0 = connected In steps of 5

11

Lifting height limiter

m

0 - 13.5

0.00

0 =not connected > 0 = connected In steps of 0.05

12

Fork’s free lift height

m

1.5 - 4.5

2.2

Upper side of fork to floor when inner guide is at the top In steps of 0.01

13

Cabin tilt start

m

0-7

0.00

0 = not connected > 0 = distance above ref. height where cab tilt starts In steps of 0.5

14

Cabin lowering start

m

0.5 - 7

0.5

Distance from last fork lift stop, where cab lowering starts In steps of 0.5

15

Indicator for drive wheel direction, steering angle

0.1

0

0 = not connected 1 = connected

16

Time display

1-4

2

1 = Ignition time 2 = total movement time 3 = drive motor time 4 = pump motor time

17

Battery size

0-5

0

0-5

18

Pump motor size

0.1

0

0 = small 1 = large

19

Clock, year

Year

0 - 99

In steps of 1

20

Clock , day

Day

1 - 31

In steps of 1

21

Clock, month

Month

1 - 12

In steps of 1

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

17 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

Only applies to electronic card no. 142575-006 • Press SW1 on the electronic card while at the same time turning the ignition key • Step using SW2 (up) and SW3 (down) to the parameter you wish to change • Press SW1 (the character window flashes) • Change the value using SW2/SW3 • Press SW1 to accept the value (character window stops flashing) If you wish to change more parameters, step using SW2/SW3 to the parameter you wish to change and repeat from “Press SW1 (the character window flashes). NOTE! Truck handling. Modifying specific truck parameters will change the driving characteristics of the truck. Do not change any parameters without the necessary knowhow.

No .

Parameter type

01

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks


1-6

3

1 = Little sensitivity 5 = Great sensitivity 6 = No progressivity In steps of 1

02

Mast type

0.1

0

0 = Older mast 1 = With valve in fork yoke

03


%

10 - 100

100


04


%

10 - 100

100


05


%

10 - 100

100

Percentage max. acceleration In steps of 5

06

Mast extension/retraction, speed

%

10 - 100

80


07


%

10 - 100

10

1350-2000 mast with integrated side shift B/E7-B/E8

20 08


18 (26)

%

10 - 100

Service Manual

20

1997-01-23

Percentage of max. oil flow In steps of 5 English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

No .

Parameter type

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks

09


%

0 - 100

100


10


%

0 - 100

0


11


m

0 - 13.5

0.00

0 = not connected > 0 = connected In steps of 0.05

12


m

1.5 - 4.5

See table below

Upper side of fork to floor when inner guide is at the top In steps of 0.01

13

Cabin tilt start

m

0-7

0.00

0= not connected >0= Distance from ref. height where cab tilt starts In steps of 0.5

14


m

0.5 - 7

1 0.5

B and N machines Ergo and Cold store

15

Indicator for drive wheel direction, steering angle

0.1

0

0 = not connected 1 = connected

16

Time display

1-4

2

1 = ignition time 2 = total movement time 3 = drive motor time 4 = pump motor time

17

Battery size

1-20

See table below

See table below

18

Pump motor size

0.1

0

0 = small 1 = large

19

Clock, year

Year

0 - 99

In steps of 1

20

Clock, day

Day

1 - 31

In steps of 1

21

Clock, month

Month

1 - 12

In steps of 1

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

19 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

10. Parameter 12

20 (26)

Lift height

Approx. setting 1350-2000 mast with integrated side shift

4400

1.42

4600

1.50

4800

1.56

1.65

5400

1.75

1.84

5700

1.85

6300

2.07

2.14

6750

2.22

2.38

7000

2.42

2.48

7500

2.56

8000

2.74

2.83

8500

2.93

3.01

9000

3.09

3.14

9500

3.19

3.27

Approx. setting B/E7-B/E8

10000

3.43

10500

3.58

10800

3.70

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

11. Parameter 17 Value

Function

Battery (Ah)

Lower discharge

900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

730, 700, 580 Greater discharge

600

14 15

480, 450

16 17

360

18 19 20 WARNING! Correct parameter setting. The battery can be destroyed. If the parameter setting is higher than recommended the battery can be over-discharged which can destroy the battery.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

21 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

Only applies to electronic card no. 142575-007 • Press SW1 on the electronic card while at the same time turning the ignition key • Step using SW2 (up) and SW3 (down) to the parameter you wish to change • Press SW1 (the character window flashes) • Change the value using SW2/SW3 • Press SW1 to accept the value (character window stops flashing) If you wish to change more parameters, step using SW2/SW3 to the parameter you wish to change and repeat from “Press SW1 (the character window flashes). NOTE! Truck handling. Modifying specific truck parameters will change the driving characteristics of the truck. Do not change any parameters without the necessary knowhow.

No.

Parameter type

01

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks


1-6

3

1 =Little sensitivity 5 = Great sensitivity 6 = No progressivity In steps of 1

02

Mast type

0.1

0


03


%

10 - 100

100


04


%

10 - 100

100


05


%

10 - 100

100


06

Mast’s extension/retraction, speed

%

10 - 100

80


07


%

10 - 100

10

1350-2000 mast with integrated side shift B/E7-B/E8

20 08

22 (26)


%

Service Manual

10 - 100

20

1997-01-23

Percentage of max. oil flow In steps of 5 English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

No.

Parameter type

Unit

Min/ Max

Std. value

Remarks

09

Connection of hydraulic extra function 1, current limit

%

0 - 100

100


10


%

0 - 100

0


11


m

0 - 13.5

0.00


12


m

1.0 - 4.5

See table below

Upper side of forks to floor when inner guide is at the top In steps of 0.01

13

Cabin tilt start

m

0-7

0.00

0 = not connected > 0 = Distance above ref. height where cab tilt starts In steps of 0.5

14


m

0.5 - 7

1 0.5

B and N machines Ergo and cold store cabin

15

Indicator for drive wheel direction and steering angle

0.1

0

0 =not connected 1 = connected

16

Time display

1-4

2

1 = ignition time 2 = total movement time 3 = drive motor time 4 = pump motor time

17

Battery size

1-20

See table below

See table below

18

Pump motor size

0.1

0

0 = small 1 = large

19

Clock, year

Year

0 - 99

In steps of 1

20

Clock, day

Day

1 - 31

In steps of 1

21

Clock, month

Mont h

1 - 12

In steps of 1

22

Priority of lift

0-1

0 = Fork lift has priority 1 = Fork lift has no priority

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

23 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

T-code

301-307,400

12. Parameter 12

24 (26)

Lift height

Approx. setting 1350-2000 mast with integrated side shift

4400

1.42

4600

1.50

4800

1.56

1.65

5400

1.75

1.84

5700

1.85

6300

2.07

2.14

6750

2.22

2.38

7000

2.42

2.48

7500

2.56

8000

2.74

2.83

8500

2.93

3.01

9000

3.09

3.14

9500

3.19

3.27

Approx. setting B/E7-B/E8

10000

3.43

10500

3.58

10800

3.70

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

C-code


T-code

001

301-307,400

13. Parameter 17 Value

Function

Battery (Ah)

Lower discharge

900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

730, 700, 580 Greater discharge

600

14 15

480, 450

16 17

360

18 19 20 WARNING! Correct parameter setting. The battery can be destroyed. If the parameter setting is higher than recommended the battery can be over-discharged which can destroy the battery.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

25 (26)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

26 (26)

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1997-01-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

C-code

5710 Electronic card

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

Electronic card Valid from serial number:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

1 (52)

F-code

Section

RT S5 Electronic card Version no

001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

1 General The electronic card is equipped with green LEDs on the inputs from the microswitches and sensors, red LEDs on the outputs to ors and valves and yellow LEDs for voltage. This card is also equipped with a potentiometer for the adjustment of the hydraulic control. The truck’s programmable parameters are stored in the electronic card. The main card supervises the truck’s steering, driving and hydraulic functions, s any faults that may arise and displays the appropriate error codes on the instrument ’s display.

2 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S5 5710 Electronic card

Version no

T-code

001

401-414

2 Terminals and voltages on A5 The terminal’s LEDs are designated as follows: I = Input, green LED O = Output, red LED Other = Yellow LED

2.1 10X ConCable nection

Designation

Active (V)

LED

101

34

Selected operator/parameter setting

+48

I

102

35

Selected operator/stepping up

+48

I

103

36

Selected operator/stepping down

+48

I

104

45

Travel direction selector, fork direction, with creep speed

+48

I

105

46

Travel direction selector, steer wheel direction, with creep speed

+48

I

106

47

Travel direction selector, fork direction

+48

I

107

48

Travel direction selector, steer wheel direction

+48

I

108

-

Spare

I

109

-

Spare

I

110

43

Safety pedal (left foot)

+48

I

111

39

Travel direction switching

+48

I

direction - kierunek fork -widly creep - pelzanie lift - podnoszenie

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

3 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414


Designation

Active (V)

LED

201

-

Spare

202

-

Indicator signal, lift

+5

203

49

Seat switch

+48

I

204

81

Weight indicator

+48

I

205

100

Lift(przechyl) height limit, by

+48

I

206

79


+48

I

207

-

Spare

208

-

Indicator signal, driving

+5

209

57

Steering wheel sensor, 180°

+48

I

210

58

Steering wheel sensor, channel A

+15

I

211

59

Steering wheel sensor, channel B

+15

I

I

I


Designation

Active (V)

LED

301

98

Lift height limiter/height meter, channel A

0–(+)10

I

302

99

Height meter, channel B

0–(+)10

I

303

106

Reference height sensor

+48

I

304

103

Cabina lowering, manual

+48

I

305

104

Cabina tilt(przechyl), selected

+48

I

306

105

Cabina tilt(przechyl), selected

+48

307

107

Electronic fan

+32/48

lift - przechyl

4 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414


Designation

Active (V)

401

117

CAN – Series (+)

+15

402

118

CAN – Series (-)

0

403

119

CANH

404

120

CANL

405

121

RS485 – Series (+)

406

122

RS485 – Series (-)

407

125

RS485 – TX (+), transmit data

408

126

RS485 – TX (-) transmit data

409

127

RS485 – RX (+), receive data

410

127

RS485 – RX (-) receive data

411

-

Spare

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

LED

5 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414


Designation

Active (V)

501

50

Potentiometer driving, reference value

+3.7–1.7

502

51

Potentiometer brake, reference value

+1.7–4.1

503

82

Potentiometer fork movement, reference value

+0.66– 3.7–6.6

504

83

Potentiometer mast, extending/retracting, reference value (wydluzenie/cofamie)

+0.77– 3.7–6.6

505

84

Potentiometer tilting(przechylu) of forks, reference value

+0.66– 3.7–6.6

506

85

Potentiometer extra (1) hydraulic function, reference value

+0.66– 3.7–6.6

507

27

Potentiometer supply

+7.35

508

28

Minus to 501–506, 510

0

509

62

Steering tachometer (+)

±3

510

86

Potentiometer extra (2) hydraulic function, reference value

+0.66– 3.7–6.6

511

129

Steering tachometer (-)

0

LED


Designation

Active (V)

601

70

Battery guard, voltage measurement (+)

+48

602

71

Battery guard, voltage/current measurement (-)

0

603

72

Battery guard, current measurement (+)

604

-

Spare

605

-

Spare

driving - jazda fork - widly guard - ochrona 6 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

LED

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414


Designation

Active (V)

LED

701

89

Valve, lifting of forks (podnoszenie widel)

+0.5–48

O

702

90

Valve, retracting mast (cofanie masztu)

+0.5–48

O

703

91

Valve, extending mast (wydluzenie masztu)

+0.5–48

O

704

92

Valve, tilting forks down (podn.widel-dol)

+0.5–48

O

705

93

Valve, tilting forks up (podn.widel-gora

+0.5–48

O

706

94

Valve, extra hydraulic function 1 A

+0.5–48

O

707

95

Valve, extra hydraulic function 1 B

+0.5–48

O

708

96

Valve, extra hydraulic function 2 A

+0.5–48

O

709

97

Valve, extra hydraulic function 2 B

+0.5–48

O

710

101

Valve, cabina tilt (przechyl) up

+0.5–48

O

711

102

Valve, cabina tilt (przechyl) down

+0.5–48

O

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

7 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414


Designation

Active (V)

LED

801

63

arm brake, active

0.2 – (+)48

O

802

64

Motor brake, released (zwolnienie)

1.5–(+)48 O

803

88

Valve, lowering (obnizenie) forks

0.2–(+)24 O

804

31

Main or

+48

O

805

21


+48

+48 V


0

806 807

24

Battery voltage, (+) 48 V after key

+48

808

23

Battery voltage, (+) 48 V po main or

+48

809

22

Battery voltage, (+) 48 V po emergency breaking

+48

810

29

Potentiometer supply, (+) 15 V

+15

811

30

Potentiometersupply, minus

0

+48 V KEY

+48 V ESO


Designation

Active (V)

901

25


+48

902

40


0

903

60

Steering motor, (+)

+48

904

61

Steering motor, (-)

+48

- podtrzymanie

8 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

LED

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

LED

Colour

Function

+ 48 V STEER

Yellow

Voltage zasilajace control electronics

+ 48 V_SR

Yellow

Steering OK

STEER PWR

Yellow

Steering OK

POWER OK

Yellow

Indicates that all voltage is fed to electronic card

Potentiometer

Function

RV 1

Trimming of the proportional valve’s opening position

3 Adjustment of lowering speed To adjust the lowering speed, see C-code 6000.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

9 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

4 Display The display function provides the possibility of examining the operator/machine specific but does not permit reprogramming. You can, however, reset the clock. For reprogramming of operator/machine parameters, see Parameter setting”. Proceed as follows to look the s: • Turn the ignition key so that the electronic card receives voltage. • Enter operator number using buttons I–III. • Hold button I down until the clock starts to blink, approx. 5 seconds. • Press I once again to step to the next function. The character window will present the different functions: • Time (C). • Warning and error codes (D). • Parameters (D). • Running time and service time (D). The address will be shown in the left-hand section and the value in the right-hand section for the “Warning/Error codes” and “Parameters”.

10 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

5 Programming 5.1 Clock When it is possible to program the clock the character window for hours will flash and after pressing I the minutes will flash. • Change by scrolling up with switch II and down with switch III.

• Store the programmed value and show the function by pressing switch I.

Function

Value

Hours

09 = 9h

Minutes

35 = 35 min.

When error codes are displayed in the character window (D) the character box (G) will light and when the parameters are displayed in character window (D) the character box (I) will light. However, it is not possible to reprogram the parameters in this mode. To change see chapter “Parameter setting”. Complete programming by turning the ignition key off and on once. Programming mode will quit if you do not press a key during a twenty second period. NOTE! Truck handling. Modifying specific truck parameters will change the driving characteristics of the truck. Do not change any parameters without the necessary know-how.

5.2 Operator parameters (n° 1-7) To re-programme the operator parameters (if the change is permitted), carry out the following: • Switch on the ignition key to feed voltage to the electronics. • Using the switches (I-III), enter the number of the operator for whom you wish to change the parameters. • Turn off the ignition key so that the electronic board is dead.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

11 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

• Press switch I at the same time as you turn the ignition key. The operator number will be shown in the indicator window (E). • Scroll using switch II (up) and switch III (down) to the parameter you want to change. • Press down switch I (the parameter number flashes). • Change the value using switches II and III. • Press down switch I to set the value (the parameter number stops flashing). If you want to change several parameters, scroll with switches II and III to the parameter you want to change and repeat from “Press switch I (the parameter number flashes)”. Conclude the programming by turning the ignition key off and on. The common truck parameters can only be reprogrammed using a service instrument see chapter “Parameter setting”.

6 Warning codes Character

Error Warning

When an error has occurred a signal sounds and a code is displayed for ten seconds in the right-hand section of the character window (D). The error is also shown in the character box (G). If the error remains after 1 min. the warning and signal will be activated again for a two second period. This happens as long as the error is not rectified. The truck can still be driven with all functions as set out in the table. WARNING! Ignoring error indications. The safety of the truck is jeopardised. Always check the operation of the truck before use.

12 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

7 Error codes 7.1 Error mode Error mode

Description/measures

Start up error

The truck does not start the drive and hydraulic functions.

Critical error

Steering safety relay releases. Main or opens. Parking brake activated.

General error

Actual function stopped.

Height error

Forks lifted at low speed.

Emergency stop on

Main s open Parking brake activated.

Steering error

Steering safety relay releases. Drive motor reverses to a standstill.

Travel regula- Main ors open. tor error Lift regulator error. Steering possible. When braking the parking brake is activated Lift regulator error

Hydraulics stopped. Values close.

Warning codes 11–99 give a 2 Hz warning signal. Error codes 100– give a 4 Hz warning signal.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

13 (52)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

5710

T-code

401-414

7.2 Safety logic The following functions give these results. X = Action

Action: Function:

K10 opens

-- = Function not possible

Y1 activates

Reversing with M1

Steering not A5 ceases possible to function

Emergency switch off

X

X

--

Ignition key

X

X

--

X

X

X

Steering fault Error in A1

X

--

--

--

Error in A2 Error in A5

--

X (+ electrical valves off) X

X

--

X

--

7.3 Warning code without ing Code

11

Description

High heatsink temperature on the electronic card

Error mode

Maximum current to the steering motor reduced

Reason for error

Seized steering/gear Seized steering bearing Faulty steering motor Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

14 (52)

Service Manual

Cool and check motor/gear

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

13

Description

No or too little pulses from the height measuring sensor with fork lifting and fork lowering.

Error mode

No action

Reason for error

Incorrectly adjusted potentiometer RV1 on electronic card A5 Faulty sensor/cables Incorrect oil quantity Too light fork carriage (no forks) Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

14

Description

Seat switch actuated more than 20 min without the truck moving

Error mode

No action

Reason for error

Bridged switch Faulty switch/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

15

Description

Safety switch actuated more than 20 min without the truck moving

Error mode

No action

Reason for error

Bridged switch Faulty switch/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

15 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

16

Description

The voltage from the accelerator’s potentiometer R1 is outside the calibrated value on start up (+/-0.2V).

Error mode

Start up error

Reason for error

Actuated pedal during start up Faulty potentiometer/bracket/cables Incorrect calibration Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Move to neutral position

Code

17

Description

The voltage from the brake pedal’s potentiometer R2 is outside the calibrated value on start up (+/-0.2V).

Error mode

Start up error

Reason for error

Actuated pedal during start up Faulty potentiometer/bracket/cables Incorrect calibration Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks


Code

18

Description

The battery on the electronic card has reached its lowest voltage

Error mode

Internal clock stops

Reason for error

The battery voltage is too low

Remarks

16 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

19

Description

Programmed parameter values lost

Error mode

Standard values have been loaded

Reason for error

Dislodged electronic card A5

Remarks

Program the card A5

Code

21

Description

Potentiometer R11 for lifting/lowering the forks gives the wrong voltage when the ignition is switched on (+/-0.6V).

Error mode

Start up error

Reason for error

Actuated joystick during start up Faulty potentiometer/bracket/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks


Code

22

Description

Potentiometer R13 for the tilt gives the wrong voltage when the ignition is switched on (+/-0.6V).

Error mode

Start up error

Reason for error


Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

17 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

23

Description

Potentiometer R12 for the mast’s in/out shifting movement gives the wrong voltage when the ignition is switched on (+/-0.6V).

Error Mode

Start up error

Reason for the error


Remarks

Code

24

Description

Potentiometer R14 or R15 for the extra functions “1” and “2” gives the wrong voltage when the ignition is switched on (+/-0.6V).

Error Mode

Start up error



Remarks

Move to the neutral position

Code

25

Description

Error in one of the output stages

Error Mode

General error


See codes 50-62 for more information Emergency driving switch for Y12 activated

Remarks

18 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

26

Description

Error in one of the output stages

Error Mode

General error


See codes 90-94 for more information

Remarks

Code

27

Description

Incorrect battery supply

Error Mode

Battery display flashes


Bad on the battery supply cables Faulty electronic card A5 Faulty battery

Remarks

Code

28

Description

Emergency switch activated

Error Mode

Emergency disconnector on


Driver action Faulty switch/cable Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Reset S21 and switch S17 off/on

Code

29

Description

Service time (S) is on zero

Error Mode

No action

Reason for the error Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

Reset with parameter

1999-05-20

English

19 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

40

Description

Warning temperature for travel motor

Error Mode

Maximum current reduced


High temperature in travel motor Faulty temperature sensor/cables Faulty frequency converter Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

41

Description

Warning temperature in drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



High temperature in frequency converter Fault fan Faulty frequency converter Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

42

Description

Current calibration error in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode

No action


Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

20 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

45

Description

Warning temperature for lift motor

Error Mode



High temperature in the lift motor Faulty temperature sensor/cable Faulty frequency converter Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

46

Description

Warning temperature in the pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



High temperature in the frequency converter Faulty fan Faulty frequency converter Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

47

Description

Current calibration error in the pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode

No action



Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

21 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

8 Warning code with registration When warning codes are displayed the codes are automatically ed. Registration takes place in the first of the 50 possible places, and move the previous errors one step downwards. With warning codes 50–62 the valve, arm brakes or cables are broken or short circuited. With warning codes 90–94 the potentiometers or cables are broken. Only the actual function is disconnected, other functions are not affected. Code

50

Description

Output 710 short circuited/broken

Error Mode

General error


Faulty cables/valve Y20 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

51

Description


Error Mode

General error


Emergency driving brake for Y1 actuated Faulty cables/valve Y21 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

52

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

22 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

53

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

54

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

55

Description


Error Mode

General error


Parameter 15 >0, no valve connected Faulty cables/valve Y16 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

56

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

23 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

57

Description


Error Mode

General error


Parameter 16 >0, no valve connected Faulty electronic card A5 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

58

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

59

Description


Error Mode

General error


Emergency driving switch for Y1 actuated Faulty cables/valve Y12 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

60

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

24 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

61

Description


Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

62

Description


Error Mode

Error in both arm brakes gives 9 km max. speed


Faulty cables/valve Y5/Y6 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

90

Description

Potentiometer R11 for lifting/lowering the forks gives wrong voltage (<0.3 or >7.0V)

Error Mode

General error


Faulty potentiometer/cables Activated input without the potentiometer being connected Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

25 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

91

Description

Potentiometer R13 for tilt gives wrong voltage (<0.3 or >7.0V)

Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

92

Description

Potentiometer R12 for the mast’s in/out shifting movement give the wrong voltage (<0.3 or >7.0V).

Error Mode

General error



Remarks

Code

93

Description

Potentiometer R14 or R15 for the extra function “1” and “2” give the wrong voltage (<0.3 or >7.0V).

Error Mode

General error


Parameter 15/16 >0, no potentiometer connected Faulty potentiometer/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

26 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

94

Description

Potentiometer R1 for the accelerator gives the wrong voltage (<0.4 or >4.6V).

Error Mode

General error


Faulty potentiometer/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

9 Error codes Character

Error Error

When an error has occurred a buzzer sounds at the same time as an error code is displayed in the right-hand section of the character window (D). (The error is also shown in the character box (G). The buzzer sounds until the ignition is switched off and the voltage to the truck is cut. If the error remains when the ignition key is switched on again the code will be shown and the buzzer will sound again. The truck can still be used with the hydraulic functions listed in the table. When an error code is shown it is automatically ed in the error . (The meaning of the error is shown in the table). Registration takes places in the first of the 50 possible positions and moves the previous error one step downward. When the is shown in the character window the latest error is shown first with the error code. To see the date when the error occurred press switch III once and to see the time press switch III once again. To see more of the ed errors press switch II. WARNING! Ignoring error indications. The safety of the truck is jeopardised. Always check the operation of the truck before use. © BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

27 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

9.1 Error codes with registration Code

104

Description


Error Mode

Critical error


Emergency driving switch for Y1 activated Faulty cables/valve Y1 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

106

Description


Error Mode

Critical error


Faulty cables/connector K10 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

107

Description

Main or K10 does not make when the ignition key and the emergency switch are not activated

Error Mode

Critical error


Faulty or K10 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

28 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

108

Description

The main ors do not open with the ignition switched off and emergency switch deactivated

Error Mode

Critical error


Faulty or K10 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

111

Description

Potentiometer R1 for the brake pedal gives the wrong voltage (<0.4 or >4.6V)

Error Mode

Critical error


Faulty potentiometer/cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

112

Description

Error when testing the brake input

Error Mode

Critical error


Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Code

120

Description

Memory cell for the steering set value contains an incorrect value

Error Mode

Steering error



Remarks

Restart can reset the error

Service Manual


1999-05-20

English

29 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

121

Description

Steering safety relay deactivated due to the incorrect voltage in the drive stage or communication error with the master processor

Error Mode

Steering error



Remarks


Code

122

Description

Warning temperature in steering servo

Error Mode

Steering error


High ambient temperature


Seized steering Faulty steering motor Faulty cables to steering motor Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

123

Description

Output voltage to the steering motor does not correspond with the requested steering

Error Mode

Steering error


Faulty steering motor Faulty cables to the steering motor Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

30 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

125

Description

Steering generator error during test

Error Mode

Steering error


Faulty generator/carbon brushes Faulty cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

126

Description

Steering error during test

Error Mode

Steering error


Faulty fuse F61 Faulty Steering/carbon brushes Faulty cables Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Code

127

Description

Communication error between the steering processor and master processor

Error Mode

Steering error


External interference (static electricity)

Remarks


Service Manual

Defective electronic card A5

1999-05-20

English

31 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

128

Description

Memory cell for the steering set value contains an incorrect value.

Error Mode

Critical error



Remarks


Code

130

Description

Communication error between I/O processor and master processor

Error Mode

Critical error



Remarks


Code

131

Description

Error during test of safety relay (steering) during start up

Error Mode

Steering error


Faulty fuse F61



Faulty cables to F61 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

133

Description

Error during test of safety relay (steering) during start up

Error Mode

Steering error



Remarks 32 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

134

Description

Safety relay (steering) has opened

Error Mode

Steering error


Electronic card A5 exposed to mechanical impact Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

135

Description

Error during test of safety relay (main circuit) during start up

Error Mode

Critical error



Remarks

Code

136

Description

Error during test of safety relay (main circuit) during start up

Error Mode

Critical error



Remarks

Code

137

Description

Safety relay (main circuit) has opened

Error Mode

Critical error


Electronic card A5 exposed to mechanical impact Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

Restart can reset error

1999-05-20

English

33 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

140

Description

Incorrect checksum in parameter memory during start up

Error Mode

Critical error



Remarks

Restart can reset error. Change a parameter and restart. a new program.

Code

141

Description

Incorrect checksum for current program

Error Mode

Critical error


Incorrect ing of program from PC



Remarks

Code

150

Description

No communications with the frequency converter during start up

Error Mode

Drive regulator error and lift regulator error


Faulty CAN-cables/resistance 15 V missing Faulty frequency converter Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

34 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

151

Description

No communications with the drive motor’s frequency converter during start up

Error Mode

Drive regulator error


Faulty CAN-cables/resistance Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

Code

152

Description

No communications with the drive motor’s frequency converter during operations

Error Mode




Remarks

Code

153

Description

No communications with the pump motor’s frequency converter during start up

Error Mode

Lift regulator error



Remarks

Code

154

Description

No communications with the pump motor’s frequency converter during operations

Error Mode




Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

35 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

155 - 163

Description

General communications error

Error Mode



Faulty CAN-cables/resistance External CAN-unit connected incorrectly Dislodged electronic card A5 Faulty electronic card A5

Remarks

Code

200-203

Description

U or memory error in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode




Remarks Code

205

Description

Too high temperature in the drive motor

Error Mode



Motor has heavy load

Remarks

Restart possible

Code

206 - 207

Description

Too high temperature in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty cooling fan

Faulty cables/temperature sensor

Faulty motor Faulty frequency converter

36 (52)

Remarks

Restart possible

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

208

Description

Too high current in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Incorrectly connected motor cables Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

Code

209 - 210

Description

Too high voltage in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty battery Faulty motor Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

Code

211 - 212

Description

Too low voltage in the drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty cables/fuse F62 External consumer connected incorrectly Faulty electronic card A5 Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

37 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

213 - 214

Description

CAN error drive motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode




Remarks

Code

220-223

Description

U or memory error in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode




Remarks

Code

225

Description

Too high temperature in pump motor

Error Mode



Motor has heavy load

Remarks

Restart possible

Code

226 - 227

Description

Too high temperature in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty cooling fan

Faulty cable/temperature sensor

Faulty motor Faulty frequency converter

38 (52)

Remarks

Restart possible

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Code

228

Description

Too high current in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Motor cables connected incorrectly Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

Code

229 - 230

Description

Too high voltage in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty battery Bad on K10’s points Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

Code

231 - 232

Description

Too low voltage in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode



Faulty cables/fuse F62 External consumer connected incorrectly Faulty electronic card A5 Faulty frequency converter

Remarks

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

39 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Code

233 - 234

Description

CAN error in pump motor’s frequency converter

Error Mode




Remarks

10 Running time When the time meter reading is shown the character box (E) is illuminated. The time is shown as follows:

Character

Time Ignition time

Total movement time

Drive motor time Pump motor time

Service time

40 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

11 Parameter setting • Connect the service key to the truck. • Press switch I while at the same time turning the ignition key. • Step using switch II (up) and switch III (down) to the parameter you wish to change. • Press switch I (the character window flashes). • Change the value using switches II / III. • Press switch I to accept the value (character window stops flashing). If you wish to change more parameters, step using switches II/III to the parameter you wish to change and repeat from “Press switch I (the character window flashes)”. NOTE! Truck handling. Modifying specific truck parameters will change the driving characteristics of the truck. Do not change any parameters without the necessary know-how.

No. Parameter type

Unit Min/Max

Std. value

Remarks

1–6

3

1 = Little sensitivity 5 = Great sensitivity 6 = No progressivity In steps of one

01


02


%

10–100

100


03


%

10–100

100


04

Drive motor, speed retardation

%

0–100

20 50 Note 1

Percentage of max. speed retardation > 0 = no speed retardation In steps of 5

05

Drive motor, retardation when reversing

%

35–100

80

Percentage of max. retardation. In steps of 5

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

41 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

No. Parameter type

Unit Min/Max

Std. value

Remarks

06

Cabin tilt start

m

0.5–7

1

Distance above ref. height where cab tilt lift starts In steps of 0.5

07

Cabin lowering starts

m

0.5–7

1

Distance above ref. height where cab tilt lowering starts In steps of 0.5

10

PIN-code for selection of operator

0000–3333

0000

0000 = PIN-code not used > 0 = PIN-code used

11


%

10–100

100


12

Mast’s retraction/ extension, speed

%

10–100

80


13


%

10–100

10

B/N/E 1-6 mast with integrated side shift B/E7-B/E8

20 14


%

10–100

20


15

Connection of hydraulic extra function 1, current limit

%

0–100

100


16


%

0–100

0


17

Lifting height limiter, level 1

m

0–13.5

13.5


18

Lifting height limiter, level 2

m

0–13.5

13.5

0 = not connected > 0 = connected In steps of 0.05 Set higher or equal to limit 1

19


m

1.0–4.5

See table below

Upper side of forks to floor when inner guide is at the top In steps of 0.01

42 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT Version no

T-code

001

No. Parameter type

Unit Min/Max

C-code

S5 5710 Electronic card 401-414

Std. value

Remarks

20

Time display

1–5

2

1 = ignition time (A) 2 = total movement time (b) 3 = drive motor time (c) 4 = pump motor time (d) 5 = service time (S)

21

Battery size

1–20

See table

See table

22

Truck type

1–5

23

Mast type

0/1

1


24

Left foot pedal

1/0

0

0 = Activates buzzer 1 = Also interrupts drive motor

25

Service interval

0–2000

1

0 = No service counter In steps of 100h

26

Cabin tilt

0/1

1

0 = B/N1-8 1 = E1-8

27

Lift has priority

0/1

1

0 = Fork lift has priority 1 = Fork lift does not have priority

37

Calibrating of weight measurement

100–5000

1000

In steps of 10

38

Calibrating of accelerator/brake pedal and reach carriage

1

0

Set to 1 for calibrating See instructions

39

Operator accessibility

1–4

1

1 = no PIN-code, open 2 = no PIN-code, locked 3 = PIN-code, open 4 = PIN-code, locked

40

Clock, year

© BT Industries AB

h

kg

Year

1 = N/B/E1-3 with arm brakes 2 = N/B/E1-3 without arm brakes 3 = B/E4-6 with arm brakes 4 = B/E4-6 without arm brakes 5 = B/E7-8

0–99

Service Manual

In steps of 1 1999-05-20

English

43 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

No. Parameter type

Unit Min/Max

41

Clock, day

Day

1–31

In steps of 1

42

Clock, month

Mont 1–12 h

In steps of 1

Note 1:

Std. value

Remarks

Driver 1 = 20 Drivers 2–10 = 50

11.1 Parameter 1 The higher the number entered the fewer turns of the steering wheel are required to turn the drive wheel. Number 6 gives steering with no progressiveness (less sensitive at higher speed).

11.2 Parameter 2 This parameter is used to set the max. permitted speed.

11.3 Parameter 3 The lower the number entered the longer it will take for the truck to reach max. speed.

11.4 Parameter 4 This parameter is used to set the force with which the truck is stopped when the accelerator is released. Note 1: Driver 1 has 20%, drivers 2-10 have 50% as standard values.

11.5 Parameter 5 This parameter is used to set the force with which the truck is stopped, when the direction is changed and the drive motor reduces the truck’s speed.

44 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

11.6 Parameters 6 and 7 These parameters are used to set the height at which the cab (RR E1-8) will tilt up/down. Both have reference heights as starting points.

11.7 Parameter 10 Value 0000 means that three operators are selected. The table below shows combinations of the first six PIN-codes. These values are displayed by stepping up/down with switches I and II.

Value

Operator’s number

0000

No PIN-code. Max three operators selected

1111

First PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

1112

Second PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

1113

Third PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

1121

Fourth PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

1122

Fifth PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

1123

Sixth PIN-code where max. 10 operators selected

etc.

etc.

11.8 Parameter 11 This parameter is used to set the max. permitted speed when switch S31 is activated.

11.9 Parameter 12 This parameter is used to adjust the speed of the mast’s retraction/extension.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

45 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

11.10 Parameter 13 to 14 These parameters are used to adjust the oil flow to the two extra functions.

11.11 Parameters 15 and 16 When these parameters are set to a value of >0 you activate the control of the potentiometer and valves for the two extra functions. You can also set the pressure you want with the help of the values.

11.12 Parameters 17 and 18 On trucks with height meters you can use these parameters to set two different maximum lift heights. The second max. lift height must be equal to or greater than the first. The last activated height is normally used as max. height before the mast reaches the top.

46 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

11.13 Parameter 19 Lift height

Approximate setting B/N/E 1-6 mast with integrated side shift

4400

1.42

4600

1.50

4800

1.56

1.65

5400

1.75

1.84

5700

1.85

6300

2.07

2.14

6750

2.22

2.38

7000

2.42

2.48

7500

2.56

8000

2.74

2.83

8500

2.93

3.01

9000

3.09

3.14

9500

3.19

3.27

Approximate setting B/E7-8

10000

3.43

10500

3.58

10800

3.70

11.14 Parameter 20 This parameter is used to set which time (A-d or S) is to be shown.

11.15 Parameter 21 This parameter is used to set which battery the truck is fitted with. You can also compensate for different driving methods. When setting the battery guard´s cut out point, measure as follows: • The acid density of the fully charged battery. This is in order to check the status of the battery. • When the battery indicator is showing 80% discharged battery (min. acid density 1.14). © BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

47 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

The acid density may vary according to battery type.

Value

Function

Battery (Ah)

Lesser discharge

900

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

730, 700, 580 CSM Greater discharge

600

14 15

480, 450

16 17

360

18 19 20 WARNING! Correct parameter setting. The battery can be destroyed. If the parameters are set higher than recommended the battery can be over-discharged and thereby destroyed.

48 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

11.16 Parameter 22 This parameter is used to activate the function and checking of the brakes coils and obtain a higher maximum speed for the truck.

11.17 Parameter 23 When this parameter is set to 1 it shows that a valve is fitted on the forks and is used as a shift valve between two functions. The direction is regulated by a valve in the larger valve block.

11.18 Parameter 24 When this parameter is set to 1 you will be able to stop the truck with the help of the drive motor but not continue driving, as the safety pedal is not activated.

11.19 Parameter 25 This parameter is used to set the service intervals for the truck. The buzzer will sound and C029 appears on the display when the service counter reaches zero. The counter will show the amount of time that has ed since the last truck service. If the previous service interval is to be used only the parameters are activated without changing the time.

11.20 Parameter 26 When this parameter is set to 1 you activate the functions and checks for the valves for cabin tilting (E 1-8).

11.21 Parameter 27 When this parameter is set to 1 you remove the lift functions priority, i.e. the hydraulic function currently in use will continue even if you activate the lift function.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

49 (52)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

11.22 Parameter 37 • Set the parameter to the weight with which the truck is to be calibrated. • Finish programming in the normal manner. • Press down the weight measurement switch while at the same time turning the ignition key on. 0000 will appear in the “time” window. • Raise the empty forks to the free lift zone until the weight set on the parameter appears in the “time” window. • Load the calibrating weight onto the forks and lift approx. 100 mm. • Press the weight measurement switch and lift until the time is once again shown in the window. The weight measurement is now calibrated.

11.23 Parameter 38 • Set the parameter to 1. • Turn the key off and on once. The speed and brake potentiometers can now be calibrated. NOTE! Incorrect calibration. Incorrect calibration values. Do not activate the controls once calibration has begun.

• Retract the reach carriage to the inner stop. • Extend the reach carriage to the outer stop. The reach cylinder’s end positions and lowering limits are now calibrated. During calibration the reach carriage will move at reduced speed.

11.24 Parameter 39 Set the parameter to 1 or 2 if only three drivers/truck handling are to be programmed. If up to ten drivers/truck handling are to be programmed the value 3 or 4 should be programmed. In the case of the latter, the value must be programmed for each driver, see parameter 10.

50 (52)

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

Display/programming possibilities with parameter 39.

Key S17 on then switch I

Parameter

Switch I on at the same time as key S17

P39-

Clock

Parameter

Operator

Clock

Parameter

Operator

-1 U. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

Chosen reprogrammable.

-1 M. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

All reprog.

-2 U. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Not reprog.

Look at chosen

-2 M. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

All reprog.

-3 U. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

Chosen reprogrammable.

-3 M. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

All reprog.

-4 U. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Not reprog.

Look at chosen

-4 M. CAN

Reprog.

Look

Look at chosen

Not reprog.

Reprog.

All reprog.

11.25 Parameter 40 to 42 These parameters can be used to set the year, day and month which will be used by the error code . 11.26 Installing a new card in the truck The electronic card A5 supplied by BT Parts has all parameters set to default values. When installing a new card in the truck some parameters must be reprogrammed so that the truck can be used safety. Potentiometer R1 on the electronic card must be adjusted according to C-code 6xxx-

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

51 (52)

F-code

Section


001

52 (52)

C-code

5710

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1999-05-20

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

C-code

5810 Pump motor

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

Pump motor Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

1 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S5 Pump motor Version no

001

C-code

5810

T-code

401-414

1. General The drive motor is a three phase AC motor. The motor contains a thermoelement which measures the motors temperature, plus a bearing with an integrated measuring unit to measure the direction and speed of rotation. There are two sizes of pump motor on the truck. On N1-N3 and B/E1-B/E6 model P112 - 150 is used. On B/E7-B/E8 model P112 - 195 is used. This service instruction describes the replacement of the bearing and the axle seal.

2. Pump motor dismantled

2 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

Version no

C-code

5810 Pump motor

T-code

001

401-414

3. Dismantling/assembling the pump motor Truck without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door Truck with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

During service in the motor compartment the cab must be fully tilted back. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever backwards • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab fully back NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service.

A © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

5810

T-code

401-414

3

3.1. Dismantling

6 • Disconnect the battery plug 7 • Lower the forks fully to reduce the pressure in the hoses and pump 12 • Pump out the oil in the hydraulic tank (3) using filter pump 4 V10-15191 • Remove the fender (4) so that the bolts (5) on the pump bracket (12) are accessible • Disconnect the temperature/speedometer ors (6) and the power cables (7) from the motor (8) • Disconnect the hydraulic hose (9) and undo the hose clamp for the hydraulic hose (10) which is located on the tank • Fit a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft • Remove the bolts (5) holding the pump bracket (12) to the chassis • Lift out the hydraulic pump and place it on a clean surface • Remove both brackets (12) from the pump motor (8) • Undo the screws and dismantle the pump (13) • Remove the drive dog

3.2. Assembling • Fit the drive dog between the pump and the pump motor (8) • Fit the pump unit (13) to the pump motor (8) • Fit both brackets (12) to the pump motor (8) • Fit a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft and attach to a crane • Lift the hydraulic pump into the truck and manoeuvre the hydraulic hose (10) to the tank (3) 8

• Attach the hose clamp • Fit the two pump brackets (12) to the chassis using the bolts (5)

• Remove the lifting eye bolt 13 • Connect the hydraulic hose (9) and the temperature/ speedometer ors (6) and power cables (7) • Fill the hydraulic tank (3) with 48 litres of new oil 4 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

Version no

C-code

5810 Pump motor

T-code

001

401-414

Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab back. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section

C-code


001

5810

T-code

401-414

4. Replacing the bearing 16

19 13

6 17

22

2 9

1 4

26 11

25 24

10 27

36 3 8 23 7 5

D 30

N

28

20

21

4.1. Dismantling • Remove the stud screws (20) using tool 08-15444 • Remove the screws (23) and the shield (3) • Remove the bearing cap (8) and washer (7) • Remove the rotor (4) from the starter (1) If both bearing are to be replaced, do so according to the following instructions. If only the pulse transducer bearing is to be replaced, go to step A. • Remove the screws (22) • Remove the shield (2) and radial seal (19) • Remove the locking ring (16) and ring (17) • Remove the sealing washer(6) from the bearing and remove the bearing with a Kukko ball bearing puller. A) • Remove the bearing (5) with a claw puller

6 (8)

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

Version no

C-code

5810 Pump motor

T-code

001

401-414

4.2. Assembly Before assembling, make sure that all parts are clean and whole. If both bearings have been replaced follow the entire instruction: • Fit the bearing cap (9) to the rotor axle’s D-side • Press the bearing (6) onto the rotor axle If only the pulse transducer bearing has been replaced: • Press the bearing (5) onto the rotor axle’s N-side • Fit the ring (17) and the locking ring (16) • Fit the seal (19) with an insert tool NOTE A new seal must always be used when assembling the rotor axle.

• Fit the rotor axle in the bearing shield (2) • Screw the bearing cap in place (9) using screws (22) and a torque of 6 Nm • Fit the rotor (4) in the starter (1) • Fit the bearing cap (8) to the rotor axle’s N-side • Fit the washer (7) to the bearing (5) Make sure that cable connection bracket 11 is positioned correctly • Fit the bearing shield (3) • Assemble the bearing cap (8) and shield (3) using the screws (23) and a torque of 6 Nm • Fit the stud screws (20) with a torque of 5 Nm

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section


001

8 (8)

C-code

5810

T-code

401-414

Service Manual

1997-10-16

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5

C-code

5830 Steering motor

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

Steering motor Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Truck no.

Note.

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General The steering motor is fitted to the drive unit’s housing. It receives signals from the steering generator located in the steering . The steering motor is fitted with a pinion which acts directly on the driving gear unit’s crown wheel. It is also fitted with two carbon brushes. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-04-01

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S5 Steering motor Version no

001

C-code

5830

T-code

301-307,400

2. Replacement of steering motor Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

The cab must be tilted 90 degrees for service in the motor compartment. While tilted, only the cabs lift/lower function is operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press switch (1) to lower the cab while at the same time turning the key. The display shows 6 lines • Move the fork lift’s hydraulic lever backwards • When the cab stops (at 15 degrees), loosen the catch (2) to release the cab • Continue pulling the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45 degrees) WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45 degrees. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab is in control of the situation. Use crane if possible.


2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-04-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

S5 5830 Steering motor

Version no

C-code

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.1. Dismantling • Turn off the truck using the ignition key • Disconnect the steering servo’s electrical or from the tank console • Undo the four screws holding the steering servo in place • Remove the steering servo • Undo the screws holding the gear wheel • Remove the gear wheel using a gear puller

2.2. Assembly • Replace O-rings if necessary • Tap the gear wheel in place on the steering servo • Tighten the screws on the gear wheel with a torque of 10 Nm • Fit the steering servo in the truck • Tighten the screws on the steering servo with a torque of 40 Nm • Connect the or

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-04-01

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S5 Steering motor Version no

001

C-code

5830

T-code

301-307,400

3. Dismantling and assembling the carbon brushes • Unscrew the plastic plugs on the upper part of the steering servo • Remove and inspect for damage • Replace carbon brushes if necessary • Fit carbon brushes and screw in the plastic plugs Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.


4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-04-01

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

Hydraulics Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General The truck’s hydraulics consist of a pump which draws up oil from the tank and transports it to the parking brake and main valve located in the reach carriage. The main valve distributes the oil to the reach cylinder and mast. Return oil from the reach cylinder and mast is transported via the main valve through the filter to the tank. Return oil from the reach carriage goes directly through the filter to the tank.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

1 (26)

F-code

RT Hydraulics Version no

001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

2. List of symbols

2 (26)

Symbol

Name

Function

1-2

Cylinder

Main lift, forks

3

Cylinder

Free lift, forks

4

Cylinder

Extension/retraction, reach carriage

5

Cylinder

Tilting, forks

6

Cylinder

Extra function 1

7

Cylinder

Extra function 2

8

Cylinder

Parking brake

9

Cylinder

Foot step

Only E1-E8

10

Cylinder

Cabin tilt

Only E1-E8

11-12

Valve

Restriction valve, main cylinder

13

Valve

Restriction valve, free lift cylinder

14

Valve

Load holding valve

15

Valve

Restriction/non-return valve, reach cylinder

16

Valve

Non-return valve

17

Valve

Shock valve, reach cylinder

18

Valve

Pressure restriction valve, overflow pressure

19

Valve

Flow control valve, fork lowering

20

Valve

Shock valve, cab tilt

Only E1-E8

21

Valve

Pressure reduction valve, cab tilt

Only E1-E8

22

Valve

Back pressure valve, foot step

Only E1-E8

23

Valve

Back pressure valve, cab tilt

Only cold store

Service Manual

1996-09-26

Remarks

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

T-code

001

© BT Products AB

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

301-307,400

Symbol

Name

Function

24

Valve

Restriction/non-return valve, M3

25

Output

Output for pressure measurement

26

Lung

Breathing bag

F

Filter

Oil filter for return flow

M

Motor

Pump motor

P

Pump

Hydraulic pump

Y1

Valve

Parking brake

Y10/2

Valve

Lifting, forks

Y10/3

Valve

Proportional valve lowering, forks

Y12

Valve

Retraction, mast

Y13

Valve

Extension, mast

Y14

Valve

Tilting down, forks

Y15

Valve

Tilting up, forks

Y16

Valve

Extra function 1

Y17

Valve

Extra function 1

Y18

Valve

Extra function 2

Y19

Valve

Extra function 2

Y20

Valve

Cabin tilt, up

Only E1-E8

Y21

Valve

Cabin tilt, down

Only E1-E8

Service Manual

1996-09-26

Remarks

Only B/E1C-B/E8C

English

3 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

3. Hydraulics diagram

4 (26)

No.

Model

Remarks

1/16

B1 - B6 without Side Shift B7 - B8 with Side Shift N1 - N3 without Side Shift

2/16

B1 - B6 with Side Shift N1 - N3 with Side Shift

With valve in fork yoke

3/16

E1 - E6 without Side Shift E7 - E8 with Side Shift

Lh < = 7 m, No. 23 in use Lh > 7 m, No. 23 not in use

4/16

E1 - E6 without Side Shift E7 - E8 with Side Shift Valid from machine no.293905 AA

Without hydraulic foot step

5/16

E1 - E6 with Side Shift

Lh < = 7 m, No. 23 in use Lh > 7 m, No. 23 not in use With valve in fork yoke

6/16

E1 - E6 with Side Shift Valid from machine no. 293905 AA

Without hydraulic foot step With valve in fork yoke

7/16

B1C - B6C without Side Shift B7C - B8C with Side Shift N1C - N3C without Side Shift

8/16

B1C - B6C with Side Shift N1C - N3C with Side Shift


9/16

E1C - E6C without Side Shift E7C - E8C with Side Shift

Lh < = 7 m, No. 23 in use Lh > 7 m, No. 23 not in use

10/16

E1C - E6C without Side Shift E7C - E8C with Side Shift Valid from machine no. 293905 AA


11/16

E1C - E6C with Side Shift

Lh < = 7 m, No. 23 in use Lh > 7 m, No. 23 not in use With valve in fork yoke

12/16

E1C - E6C with Side Shift Valid from machine no. 293905 AA


13/16

Cold store E1C - E6C without Side Shift E7C - E8C with Side Shift

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400

No.

Model

Remarks

14/16

Cold store E1C - E6C without Side Shift E7C - E8C with Side Shift


15/16

Cold store E1C - E6C with Side Shift


16/16

Cold store E1C - E6C with Side Shift


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

5 (26)

F-code


001

6 (26)

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

T-code

001

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

301-307,400

English

7 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

3.1. Hydraulics diagram 1/16

8 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

9 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


10 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

11 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


12 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

13 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


14 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

15 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


16 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

17 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


18 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

19 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


20 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

21 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400


22 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400


© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

23 (26)

F-code


001

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

4. Adjustment of fork lowering rate Before adjusting the fork lowering rate, make sure the hydraulic system has been warmed up for at least 10 minutes in order to achieve the correct readings. • Raise the forks, unloaded, to eye level • Push the lowering potentiometer 2-2.5 mm forwards • Adjust the LOWER potentiometer on the electronic card A5 until the forks start to lower slowly • Raise the forks, unloaded, to the max. height • Adjust the valve to the correct lowering speed • Check that lowering from free lift to main lift functions correctly • Seal the valve and potentiometer A = Flow control for fork lifting B = Flow control for fork lowering

Lowering speed above free lift , unloaded (m/s)

Model

Min

Nom

Max

RR N1

0.49

0.52

0.55

RR B/E1-B/E3, N2-N3

0.49

0.52

0.55

RR B/E4-B/E6

0.49

0.52

0.55

RR B/E7-B/E8

0.53

0.56

0.59

Error code 0 13 If the error code 0 13 is displayed turn the potentiometer LOWER on the electronic card A5 anti-clockwise and increase the flow from the valve until the correct speed is reached. NOTE! If error code 0 13 is displayed on a truck without a height indicator, check that parameter 11 is set at 0. See chapter 5710 Programming parameters.

24 (26)

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

Version no

C-code

6000 Hydraulics

T-code

001

301-307,400

5. Adjusting the max. lifting capacity Before adjusting the lifting capacity make sure the hydraulic system has been warmed up for at least 10 minutes in order to achieve the correct readings. • Extend the reach carriage • Lower the forks to floor level • Remove the seal on the adjustment screw (A) • Load the forks with the max. weight

Model

Min (kg)

Max (kg)

RR N1

1350

1620

RR N1 Side-shift

1225

1470

RR B/E1-B/E3, N2-N3

1600

1920

RR B/E1-B/E2, N2 Side-shift

1475

1770

RR B/E/N3 (Side-shift standard)

1475

1770

RR B/E4-B/E6

2000

2400

RR B/E4-B/E6 Side-shift

1875

2250

RR B7-B8 (side shift standard)

2500

3000

The correct lift capacity has been reached when the inner guide stops just above the free lift (approx. 10 mm). • Lower the forks to floor level Adjust the lifting capacity with the adjustment screw (A) on the main valve. A = Flow control for fork lifting B = Flow control for fork lowering • Loosen the locking nut Turn adjustment screw (A) outwards to increase flow. Turn adjustment screw (A) inwards to decrease flow. • Tighten the locking nut Seal the adjustment screw (A).

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

25 (26)

F-code


001

26 (26)

Section

C-code

S6

6000

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1996-09-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6

C-code

6140 Hydraulic pump

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400

Hydraulic pump Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General The truck is fitted with two different sized pumps. Models N1-N3 and B/E1- B/E6 are fitted with Eckerle GF 2-19 with a max. flow of 48 litres per minute. Models B/E7-B/E8 are fitted with Eckerle GF 2-22 with a max. flow of 60 litres per minute.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S6 Hydraulic pump Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

6140

2. Replacing the hydraulic pump/ pump motor Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.



2 (4)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT

S6 6140 Hydraulic pump

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

2.1. Dismantling • Disconnect the battery plug • Lower the forks fully to reduce the pressure in the hoses and pump • Pump out the oil in the hydraulic tank using, e.g. pump SHT/A l No. 100 • Remove the fender (4) in order to reach the bolts (5) on the pump bracket (12) • Disconnect the carbon brush indicator cables (6) and the power cables (7) from the pump motor (8) • Remove the hydraulic hose (9) and loosen the hose clip on hydraulic hose (10) attached to the tank • Remove the fan cover (11) and attach a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft • Truck with tilting cab: Remove the valve unit located on the pump bracket (12) • Remove the bolts (5) holding the pump bracket (12) to the chassis • Remove the hydraulic pump • Remove both brackets (12) from the pump motor (8) • When replacing the hydraulic pump: Remove the hose connection from the pump unit (13) • When replacing the pump motor: Remove the pump unit (13) together with the hose connection from the pump motor (8)

2.2. Assembly Assembly time: approx. 1 hour. • If the pump motor (8) has been replaced: Fit the pump unit (13) to the pump motor (8) • If the hydraulic pump has been replaced: Connect the hose connection to the pump unit (13) • Fit both brackets (12) on the pump motor (8) • Screw a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft and attach to a crane © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

301-307,400

C-code

6140

• Lift the hydraulic pump into the truck and move the hydraulic hoses (10) to the tank (3) • Screw on the hose clip • Screw the two pump brackets (12) to the chassis using the bolts (5) • On trucks with tilting cab: Tighten the valve unit on the bracket (12) on the pump motor • Remove the lifting eye bolt and refit the fan cover (11) • Reconnect the hydraulic hose (9), the carbon brush indicator cables (6) and the power cables (7) • Fill the hydraulic tank (3) with 48 litres new oil Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston. • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position. Truck without tilting cab • Close the door and tighten the knob.

4 (4)

Service Manual

1996-11-13

English

F-code

Section

RT


IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

SSD

K-G Andersson

001

401-414

C-code

Hydraulic pump Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General There is only one size of pump in the truck and this has a maximum flow of 60 litres per minute. There are two different sized pump motors. Models N1-N3 and B/E1-B/E6 are fitted with P150. Models B/E7-B/E8 are fitted with P195. This service instruction describes the replacement of the hydraulic pump.

© BT Industries AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

401-414

C-code

6140

2. Replacing the hydraulic pump/ pump motor Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work. WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

When you carry out a service in the motor compartment you should tilt the cab fully. While tilted, only the cab’s lift/lower functions are operational and then only at crawl speed. • Press the switch (1) for cab lowering at the same time as the key is turned. The display shows 6 lines. • Move the hydraulic lever for fork lift backwards. • When the cab stops (at 15°), loosen the catch (2) t hat releases the cab. • Continue to move the lever backwards until the cab stops (at 45°). !

WARNING! Falling cab! The cab can fall without dampening when tilted over 45°. The cab is heavy so make sure the person receiving the cab controls the situation. Use a crane if possible.

• Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab fully. NOTE! Falling cab! Insert the pin (which is located under the seat) in the cylinder piston to avoid the cab accidentally falling backwards during service. .

A 2 (4)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT


Version no

T-code

001

401-414

C-code

3

2.1. Dismantling

6

• Disconnect the battery plug.

7

• Lower the forks fully to reduce the pressure in the hoses and pump.

12 4

• Pump out the oil in the hydraulic tank using filter pump V10-15191. • Remove the fender (4) in order to reach the bolts (5) on the pump bracket (12). • Undo the temperature/speedometer ors (6) and power cables (7) from the pump motor (8). • Remove the hydraulic hose (9) and loosen the hose clip on hydraulic hose (10) attached to the tank. • Attach a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft. • Remove the bolts (5) holding the pump bracket (12) to the chassis. • Remove the hydraulic pump and place it on a clean surface. • Remove both brackets (12) from the pump motor (8). • Remove the hose connection from the pump unit (13). • Undo the screws and dismantle the pump (13). • Remove the carrier.

8

13

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section


T-code

001

401-414

C-code

6140

2.2. Assembly • Fit the hose coupling to the pump unit (13). • Fit the carrier between the pump and pump motor (8). • Fit the pump unit (13) to the pump motor (8). • Fit both brackets (12) on the pump motor (8). • Screw a lifting eye bolt to the crank shaft and attach to a crane. • Lift the hydraulic pump into the truck and move the hydraulic hoses (10) to the tank (3). • Screw on the hose clip. • Screw the two pump brackets (12) to the chassis using the bolts (5). • Remove the lifting eye bolt. • Reconnect the hydraulic hose (9) and the temperature/ speedometer ors (6) and the power cables (7). • Fill the hydraulic tank (3) with 48 litres new oil. Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston. • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position. Truck without tilting cab • Close the door and tighten the knob.

4 (4)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

Issued by

SSD

Approved by

F-code

Section

C-code

RT

S7

6270 Hose reel

Version no

T-code

K-G Andersson

001

301-307,401-414

Hose reel Applies to machine numbers:

© BT Industries AB

T-code

Model

Machine No.

301

RR N1-N3, N1C-N3C

265200AA-

302

RR B1-B3, B1C-B3C

265200AA-

303

RR B4-B6, B4C-B6C

265200AA-

304

RR B7-B8, B7C-B8C

265200AA-

305

RR E1-E3, E1C-E3C

265200AA-

306

RR E4-E6, E4C-E6C

265200AA-

307

RR E7-E8, E7C-E8C

265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1998-04-02

English

Not.

1 (4)

F-code

RT Hose reel Version no

001

Section

C-code

S7

6270

T-code

301-307,401-414

1. General This assembly instruction contains essential information for trouble-free installation and operation. The enclosed instruction contains directions as well as information about inspection and maintenance.

2. Assembly Assemble the hose reel or the spring as per the illustration. To pretighten the spring turn the hose reel with completely unwound reel in extractable direction. Pretightening of the hose drum: • Right extraction clockwise. • Left extraction anticlockwise. WARNING! Tightened spring. The hose can cause injury. Always handle the hose reel with care.

The number of revolutions is dependant on the length and diameter of the hose, see table. The stated values apply as guidelines. Spring pretightening (revolutions).

Hose diameter (mm) 6.3 8

Hose length (m) 2.7 3 3.3

5

6

7

8.5

4

3 3

3 3

3 -

1.5-2 -

4

4 -

Only after the correct pretightening has been achieved is the hose pulled out of the drum.

2 (4)

Service Manual

1998-04-02

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

Version no

C-code

6270 Hose reel

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3. Inspection after assembly On start-up, lift the forks to the maximum lift height. Check that hose and hose drums function correctly and count the number of revolutions that the hose drum turns. The maximum sum of the total revolutions made by hand on pretightening and the number of revolutions on the maximum extraction is 10. Revolutions on pretightening + revolutions in operation = max 10 NOTE During maximum lift height, the hose must not be completely unwound from the hose drum. At least ¼ revolution of hose must be left on the hose drum.

Test with maximum extracted hose that further turning can be done by hand. The hose drum must not lock itself. Check that the hose is correctly rolled up when sinking the forks, the hose must be taut the whole time. It must always be taut otherwise there is a risk that the hose will slip over the side plates. In the event of this, adjust the pretightening. NOTE The loop of the spring must be turned towards the unwinding direction of the hose.

Reserve parts must correspond to technical specifications laid down by the manufacturer. This requirement is always fulfilled when using original parts.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-04-02

English

3 (4)

F-code

RT Hose reel Version no

001

4 (4)

Section

C-code

S7

6270

T-code

301-307,401-414

Service Manual

1998-04-02

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7000 Mast/cylinders

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H. Forsman

001

301-307, 401-414

Mast/cylinders Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1998-04-06

English

Notes

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 7.0 Mast/cylinders Version no

001

C-code

7000

T-code

301-307, 400

1. General The truck has many different types of cylinder. The parking brake cylinder is a single action cylinder which is spring loaded. It is pushed out by oil pressure and pulled back by a spring. The cab tilting cylinder, lift cylinders and free lift cylinder are all single action cylinders. These cylinders are pushed out by oil pressure but pushed back by the weight of the cab or the forks. The reach cylinder, tilt cylinder and the side-shift cylinder are double action cylinders. They are pushed both in and out by oil pressure.

2. Assembly tools 2.1. For lift cylinder on mast with valve in fork yoke (1600 and 2000 kg mast)

2 (4)

Tool no.

Comment

08-15364

To protect the piston rod seal from damage by the cylinder thread

08-15366

Assembly of piston rod seal on 08-15367

08-15367

Assembly of piston rod seal on piston

08-15368

Assembly of stop ring on 08-15369

08-15369

Assembly of stop ring on 08-15370

08-15370

Assembly of stop ring on piston rod

08-15391

Hook wrench 60-90 with 5 mm stud

08-15393

Pipe wrench

08-15400

Assembly of restriction valve

Service Manual

1997-04-04

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S 7.0 7000 Mast/cylinders

Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400

2.2. For free lift cylinder on mast with valve in fork yoke (1600 and 2000 kg mast)

© BT Products AB

Tool no

Comment

08-15365

To protect the piston rod seal from damage by the cylinder thread

08-15418

Insert tool to be used together with tool 08-15419

08-15419

Assembly of piston rod seal on piston

08-15391

Hook wrench 60-90 with 5 mm stud

08-15393

Pipe wrench

08-15417

Assembly of restriction valve

Service Manual

1997-04-04

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S 7.0 Mast/cylinders Version no

001

4 (4)

C-code

7000

T-code

301-307, 400

Service Manual

1997-04-04

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S7

7100 Mast

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-303,305,306,401-

Mast Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

301


290109AA-

302


290109AA-

303


290109AA-

305


290109AA-

306


2290109AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

1. General This section describes how you adjust play in the mast. A mast has three guides, the inner, middle and outer guide. The inner and middle guides have four rollers each. The fork carriage also has four rollers. These rollers must be adjusted with shims in order to allow as little play as possible.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-09

English

1 (4)

F-code

RT Mast Version no

001

Section

C-code

S7

7100

T-code

301-303,305,306,401-

2. Dismantling • Dismantling the mast from the truck NOTE! Oil leakage. Risk for valve and cylinder damage if dirt enters the hydraulic connections. Plug all hydraulic connections.

• Place the mast horizontally on pallets or similar. • Dismantle the triple hose and or X50 from the fork carriage. • Dismantle the triple hose roller from the free lift cylinder. • Remove the triple hose from the mast but let it remain in place in the outer guide. • Remove the distribution block with the main hose from the pipe to the main lift cylinders • Dismantle the supply hose bracket from the inner guide. • Dismantle the free lift chain. • Dismantle the main lift cylinders. • Dismantle the main lift chains but let them remain in place in the outer guide. • Dismantle the main chain rollers and the triple hose roller in the base of the mast. • Remove the fork carriage from the mast. • Remove the inner guide from the mast using the following lifting yokes: For 1600 kg mast use lifting yoke BT 11-1020 For 2000 kg mast use lifting yoke BT011-1021

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-10-09

English

F-code

RT Version no

Section

C-code

S7

7100 Mast

T-code

001

301-303,305,306,401-

Shimming the mast • Use a dial test indicator and a crow bar to measure the amount of play. • Measure the mast when extended and retracted NOTE: Maximum play at lower edge is 1 mm Maximum play at upper edge is 0,4 mm • Dismantle the guide from the mast. • Remove the rollers that require shimming. • Fit the shims to the roller studs. • Fit the rollers. • Fit the guide in the mast. • Check the amount of play. • Fasten the middle and outer guides to each other. • Fit the inner guide in the mast. • Measure and fit shims according to the instructions above. • Fit the fork carriage in the mast. • Measure and fit shims according to the instructions above.

3. Assembly • Fit the free lift chain. • Fit the main lift cylinder. • Fit the main lift chain roller. • Fit the main lift chains. • Fit the triple hose and or X50 in the fork carriage. • Fit the triple hose roller on the free lift cylinder. • Fit the distribution block with supply hose to the pipe for the main lift cylinders. • Fit the supply hose bracket on the inner guide. NOTE! The triple hose can separate. Risk of the triple hose breaking. Make sure that the triple hose rollers are in line.

• Fit the mast to the truck.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-10-09

English

3 (4)

F-code

RT Mast Version no

001

4 (4)

Section

C-code

S7

7100

T-code

301-303,305,306,401-

Service Manual

1997-10-09

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code

S7.0 7190 Mast fixation points

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307, 400

Mast fixation points Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General This is an assembly guide for the mast. Also included in this document is a list of tools and instructions on transport of the truck.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

1 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S7.0 Mast fixation points Version no

001

C-code

7190

T-code

301-307,400

2. Tools • Crane with minimum 2500 kg capacity • 1/2’’ catch • 13 mm socket • 24 mm socket • 30 mm socket • 4 mm Allen key • 5 mm Allen key • ½’’ torque wrench 0 - 270 Nm • ¾’’ torque wrench 0 - 500 Nm • Crow bar • Large screwdriver • 17 mm wrench • 19 mm wrench • 27 mm wrench • 32 mm wrench • 36 mm wrench • Rags • Absorbent • Cable ties

2 (8)

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400

3. Transport of truck There are two methods of transporting the truck once the battery has been removed. Method 1 If the truck is to be transported over a longer distance a fork lift with the following capacity should be used.

Load

N1

N2-N3

B/E1-B/E3

B/E4-B/E6

B/E7-B/E8

Load centre distance (Tp)

950

950

950

1000

1000

Weight without battery

1700

1700

1800

2250

2850

• Slide the forks in under the arms as illustrated Method 2 An extension cable from a nearby battery may be used to move the truck over a shorter distance.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

7190

T-code

301-307,400

4. Assembly • Transport the truck to an assembly area using a crane • Clip off the steel bands from around the arms • Lift off the forks • Connect the truck to 48 VDC • Move the reach carriage out approximately 200 mm • Remove the load • Extend the reach carriage fully • Switch off the current using the key and disconnect 48 VDC • Remove the cover plate from the reach carriage • Loosen the 4 M16 bolts and remove the upper part of the pin bracket (see illustration)

4 (8)

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400

• Use the mast assembly kit which contains the following items: 2 bolts and 2 washers for securing the mast to the reach carriage’s lower bracket. 2 socket head screws which attach the two halves of the cover plate to the reach carriage. 6 bolts for fastening the load . 4 washers for the pins on the mast. 0 - 6 shims for adaptation of mast angle forwards and backwards. The mast angle should be 90° ± 6. 1 two part hose clip for the feed hose on the mast. • Cut away the the steel bands on the mast except for the topmost band • Lift the mast with the help of a crane and tools 11-1091 for N/B/E1-N/B/E3, B/E4-B/E6 and 11-1133 for B/E7-B/E8 • Place the washers on the pins • Move the mast carefully towards the reach carriage • Stop approximately 100 mm from the reach carriage • Fit the feed hose in the reach carriage • Move the mast in fully and lower it so that it rest on the pins • Put the upper pin brackets in place and screw down loosely • Screw in the bolts which secure the mast to the reach carriage’s lower bracket, leaving room for the shims • Fit the shims and move the crane in the direction of the forks so they are held firmly against the mast • Tighten the bolts with the following torques

© BT Products AB

N1-N3

B/E1-B/E8

Pin bracket bolts

222 Nm

222 Nm

Lower bolts

222 Nm

434 Nm

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

7190

T-code

301-307,400

• Screw the distribution block in place on the wall of the reach carriage • Assemble the mast’s feed hose using the hose clips on the wall of the reach carriage (2) • Remove the plugs from the feed hose (4) and the main valve (3) • Fit the feed hose (4) to the valve (3) • Connect the side shift cable to the socket bracket (1) on the reach carriage • Connect the height indicator cable to the bracket (1) on the reach carriage

6 (8)

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

C-code


Version no

T-code

001

301-307, 400

• Remove the plugs from the tilt hoses • Fit the tilt hoses to the side of the mast (5) • Cut away the upper steel band on the mast • Connect the truck to 48 VDC and raise the forks approximately 1000 mm • Fit the forks on the fork yoke • Place the load on the forks and screw down the lower screws • Turn up the load and screw down the remaining screws • Tighten the load ’s screws with a torque of 45 Nm • Screw down the cover plate over the main valve on the reach carriage • Gather together all the cables and hoses so that they cannot be damaged • Wash or wipe away any oil on the truck

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section


001

8 (8)

C-code

7190

T-code

301-307,400

Service Manual

1997-05-26

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7310 Lift cylinder

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,400

Lift cylinder Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-290109AA

302


265200AA-290109AA

303


265200AA-290109AA

304


265200AA-290109AA

305


265200AA-290109AA

306


265200AA-290109AA

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

Notes

1. General There are two different types of lift cylinder. One on masts without a valve on the fork carriage and one on masts with a valve on the fork carriage. Instructions for masts without a valve on the fork carriage are given in version 001 of service document S7310. Instructions for masts with a valve on the fork carriage are given in version 002 of service document S7310. Each mast has two lift cylinders. Each cylinder is fitted with a restriction valve which prevents the forks from falling in the case of a break in the hydraulics.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Lift cylinder Version no

001

C-code

7310

T-code

301-307,400

2. Masts without a valve on the fork carriage 2.1. Dismantling the cylinder

• Remove the cylinder from the mast. • Place the lower stop (6) in a vice, allowing the upper part to rest against a yoke so that the cylinder is lying in a horizontal position. • Tap the top sleeve (2) carefully with a rubber hammer. Heat may be carefully applied, if necessary. • Unscrew the top sleeve (2) using a pipe wrench 08-15393. • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface. • Knock out the top sleeve (2) with a rubber hammer.

2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

Version no

C-code

7310 Lift cylinder

T-code

001

301-307,400

2.2. Dismantling the piston rod seal and ring on the lift cylinder • Force a screw driver into the seal (5) without marking the piston (3) in any way. NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage.

• Lift the piston rod seal (5) very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal (5) with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston (3) • Remove the ring (4)

2.3. Assembling the piston rod seal and ring on the lift cylinder • Fit the ring (4) and the piston rod seal (5) on the piston

2.4. Removing the piston from the lift cylinder • Remove the piston rod seal (5) plus the ring (4) • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston (3) • Unscrew the piston (3) using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Brush away the old seal

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section


001

C-code

7310

T-code

301-307,400

2.5. Fitting the piston in the lift cylinder • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston (3) in place using tool 08-15390 • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

2.6. Dismantling and assembly of restriction valve • Unscrew and remove the restriction valve (7) using tool 08-15400 • Assemble the restriction valve (7) using tool 08-15400

2.7. Assembling the cylinder • Use tool 08-15364 when fitting the piston rod in the cylinder • Remove the assembly sleeve 08-15364 • Fit the top sleeve to the piston rod using a rubber hammer • Screw down the top sleeve on the cylinder a few turns • On 2500 kg lift cylinders the bleeding hole and the hole for the restriction valve are on the same side of the cylinder • On 1350 - 2000 kg lift cylinders the bleeding hole and the hole for the restriction valve are on opposite sides of the cylinder • Apply sealant FD 1042 to the thread • Tighten with a hook spanner NOTE! The drying time for the sealant is four hours, before which the cylinder must not be used. 4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7310 Lift cylinder

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

002

301-306,400

Lift cylinder Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

301


290109AA-

302


290109AA-

303


290109AA-

304


290109AA-

305


290109AA-

306


290109AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

290109AA-

Notes

1. General There are two different types of lift cylinder. One on masts with a valve on the fork carriage and one on masts without a valve on the fork carriage. Instructions for masts with a valve on the fork carriage are given here in version 002 of service document S7310. Instructions for masts without a valve on the fork carriage are given in version 001 of service document S7310. Each mast has two lift cylinders. Each cylinder is fitted with a restriction valve which prevents the forks from falling in the case of a break in the hydraulics.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

1 (4)

F-code

Section


T-code

002

301-306,400

C-code

7310

2. Masts with a valve on the fork carriage 2.1. Dismantling the lift cylinder from the mast • Detach the top of the lifting chain nearest the cylinder and lay it on the floor over the reach carriage • Remove the lifting chain wheel • Place the inner guide on blocks approximately 50 cm above the floor • Lower the free lift cylinder fully • Detach the connecting pipe from the lift cylinder and the main valve. The cylinder can now be removed • Plug the connection on the main valve • Make sure the lifting chain can neither cause damage nor be damaged while the mast is raised fully • Undo the cylinder from the lower stop • Undo the upper cylinder • Remove the cylinder from the mast

2.2. Dismantling the cylinder

• Remove the cylinder from the mast • Place the lower stop (9) in a vice, allowing the upper part to rest against a yoke so that the cylinder is lying in a horizontal position • Tap the top sleeve and the cylinder carefully with a rubber hammer. Heat may be carefully applied, if necessary. • Unscrew the top sleeve (1) using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface • Knock out the top sleeve (1) with a rubber hammer 2 (4)

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7310 Lift cylinder

Version no

T-code

002

301-306,400

2.3. Dismantling the piston rod seal, guide ring, guide ring bracket and locking ring from the lift cylinder • Remove the circlip (8) • Remove the piston rod seal (7) • Dismantle the guide ring bracket (5) • Remove the guide ring (6) from the bracket (5) • Remove the locking ring (4)

2.4. Assembling the piston rod seal, guide ring, guide ring bracket and locking ring in the lift cylinder • Fit the locking ring (4) on the piston rod using tool 08-15368, 08-15369 and 08-15370 • Fit the guide ring (6) in the guide ring bracket (5) • Fit the guide ring bracket (5) on the piston rod • Place tool 08-15367 in position on the piston rod • Place the piston rod seal (7) in position on tool 08-15366 • Fit the piston rod seal (7) on the piston rod • Fit the circlip (8)

2.5. Dismantling and assembly of the restriction valve Both dismantling and assembly of the restriction valve (10) is done using tool 08-15400.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

3 (4)

F-code

Section


T-code

002

301-306,400

C-code

7310

2.6. Assembling the cylinder • Use tool 08-15364 To fit the piston rod into the cylinder • Remove assembly sleeve 08-15364 • Fit the top sleeve (1) on the piston rod using a rubber hammer • Screw the top sleeve (1) to the cylinder a few turns • Apply sealant FD 1042 to the thread • Tighten using tool 08-15391 • On 1350 - 2000 kg lift cylinders the bleeder hole and the hole for the restriction valve are on opposite sides • Assemble the cylinder in the mast NOTE! The drying time for the sealant is four hours, before which the cylinder must not be used.

2.7. Assembling the cylinder in the mast • Place the cylinder in the mast • Screw the cylinder to the lower stop • Fit the cylinder • Place the inner guide on blocks approximately 50 cm above the floor • Lower the mast • Remove the plug from the main valve • Attach the connecting pipe to the cylinder and the main valve • Raise the forks until the lift cylinder reaches the top beam • Screw the cylinder to the top beam • Lower the forks fully • Assemble the chain wheel and the lifting chain • Adjust the chain so that it doesn’t pull unevenly 4 (4)

Service Manual

1997-03-17

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7320 Tilt cylinder

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,401-414

Tilt cylinder Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303

RR B4-B6,B4C-B6C/14

265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

Notes

1 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Tilt cylinder

C-code

7320

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

1. General The fork tilt cylinder is situated on the mast behind the fork yokes lower edge. This is a double action cylinder, which means that the piston is moved both in and out by oil pressure. When the piston moves out the fork yokes lower edge moves outwards and tilts the forks upwards. This document is divided into two sections: Masts with a valve on the fork carriage and Masts without a valve on the fork carriage.

2 (8)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7320 Tilt cylinder

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2. Masts with a valve on the fork carriage 2.1. Dismantling the fork carriage • Raise the fork carriage to a suitable working height • Remove the forks • Remove the circlip to dismantle the side-shift (2) or stay (1) • Undo the screws (11) and remove the stop lugs (12) • Fasten a cable around the fork yoke (3) and lift it off using a crane • Undo the screws (4) to remove the plate (5) plus the slide plate (6) • Undo the screws (10) on the fork carriage (13) • Remove the tilt cylinder • Knock out the roll pin (8) and remove the plate (7)

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

3 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Tilt cylinder

C-code

7320

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2.2. Dismantling the cylinder • Undo the 8 screws (14) • Remove the piston rod very carefully from the cylinder so as not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface to prevent it being damaged. .

2.3. Removing the piston rod seal • Force a screw driver into the seal without marking the piston in any way NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage.

• Lift the piston rod seal very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston

2.4. Dismantling the piston • Remove the piston rod seal • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston • Unscrew the piston using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Brush away the old seal

4 (8)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7320 Tilt cylinder

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2.5. Assembling the piston • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston in place using a hook spanner • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

2.6. Fitting the piston rod seal • Fit the piston rod seal carefully

2.7. Assembling the cylinder • Place the piston rod in the cylinder • Screw in place with the 8 screws

2.8. Assembling the fork carriage • Fit the plate (7) and lock in place with the roll pin (8) • Fit the tilt cylinder with the screws (10) • Fit the sliding plate (6) and the plate (5) with the screws (4) • Lift the fork yoke (3) into place using a crane • Fit the stop lugs (12) with the screws (11) • Fit the side shift (2) or stay (1) • Fit the forks

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

5 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Tilt cylinder

C-code

7320

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3. Masts without a valve on the fork carriage 3.1. Dismantling the fork carriage • Raise the fork carriage to a suitable working height • Remove the forks • Lift the fork yoke using a crane • Remove the screws (4) and washers (3) • Knock out the axles (5) • Remove the fork yoke • Undo the screws (6) and remove the tilt cylinder

6 (8)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7320 Tilt cylinder

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3.2. Dismantling the cylinder • Undo the 8 screws (7) • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface.

3.3. Dismantling the piston rod seal • Force a screw driver into the seal without marking the piston in any way. NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage.

• Lift the piston rod seal very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston

3.4. Dismantling the piston • Remove the piston rod seal • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston • Unscrew the piston using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Brush away the old seal

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

7 (8)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Tilt cylinder

C-code

7320

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3.5. Assembling the piston • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston in place using a hook spanner • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

3.6. Fitting the piston rod seal • Fit the piston rod seal carefully

3.7. Assembling the cylinder • Place the piston rod in the cylinder • Screw in place with the 8 screws

3.8. Assembling the fork carriage • Fit the tilt cylinder using the screws (6) • Lift the fork yoke into place • Knock the axles (5) into place • Screw the axles in position using the screws (4) and washers (3) • Assemble the forks

8 (8)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7

C-code

7330 Reach cylinder

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,401-414

Reach cylinder Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General The reach cylinder is located in the reach carriage. The reach cylinder is a double action cylinder. It is the main valve which determines in which direction the cylinder shall move.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

RT S7 Reach cylinder

C-code

7330

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2. Assembling and dismantling the reach cylinder Trucks without tilting cab • Undo the knob to the side of the drivers seat and open the door. • Unscrew and remove the foot step. Trucks with tilting cab Make sure there is sufficient room to tilt the cab before starting work WARNING! Risk of crushing. The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when the cab is tilted back. Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.



2 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7 7330 Reach cylinder

C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3. Dismantling • Swing open the door • Detach the foot step from the foot step cylinder • Unscrew the return hose from the tank • Plug the return hose at the tank • Remove s X18 and X19 from the plate • Unscrew and remove the hoses from the reach cylinder • Unscrew and remove the upper left screw on the cover plate • Unscrew and remove the screws holding the pins • Fasten a lifting eye bolt or similar to the pins • Pull out the pins • Remove the reach cylinder • Remove the bracket for the magnet and rod from the piston • Unscrew and remove the aluminium profile from the cylinder

3.1. Dismantling the cylinder • Place the lower stop in a vice, allowing the upper part to rest against a yoke so that the cylinder is lying in a horizontal position. • Knock the piston rod housing carefully with a rubber hammer • Unscrew the piston rod housing using a pipe wrench • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface • Knock out the top sleeve with a rubber hammer.

3.2. Dismantling the piston rod seal and ring • Force a screw driver into the seal without marking the piston in any way NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage. © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section


C-code

7330

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

• Lift the piston rod seal very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston • Remove the ring

3.3. Assembling the piston rod seal and ring • Fit the ring and the piston rod seal on the piston

3.4. Dismantling the piston • Remove the piston rod seal plus the ring • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston • Unscrew the piston using a pipe wrench • Brush away the old sealant

3.5. Assembling the piston • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston in place using a hook wrench • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

3.6. Assembling the cylinder • Place the piston rod in the cylinder • Fit the top sleeve on the piston rod using a rubber hammer • Screw the top sleeve to the cylinder a few turns • Apply sealant FD 1042 to the thread • Tighten using tool a hook wrench • Fit the cylinder in the truck NOTE! The drying time for the sealant is four hours, before which the cylinder must not be used.

4 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7 7330 Reach cylinder

C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

4. Assembly • Fit the aluminium profile on the cylinder • Fit the magnet and rod on the piston • Assemble the reach cylinder • Knock in the pins • Screw in the screws holding the pins in place • Screw on the cover plate • Attach s X18 and X19 to the plate • Fit the hoses to the cylinder • Fit the return hose to the tank Truck with tilting cab Ensure that no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. WARNING! Risk for crushing! The risk for personal injury is extremely great if anyone is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab. Ensure no one is in the motor compartment when tilting the cab.

• Remove the pin from the cylinder piston. • Take hold of the protective roof and tilt the cab to the 45 degree position. • Move the fork lifts hydraulic lever forwards until the cab comes to rest in the lower position. Truck without tilting cab • Screw the foot step in place • Close the door and tighten the knob

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section


C-code

7330

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

6 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S7 7340 Free lift cylinder

C-code

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H Forsman

001

301-307,401-414

Free lift cylinder Valid from serial number: T-code

Model

Serial No

Notes

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

401

RR N1-N3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1C-N3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-B3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1C-B3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-B6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5C-B6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-B8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7C-B8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-E3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1C-E3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-E6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5C-E6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-E8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7C-E8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

1. General The free lift cylinder is the centre most cylinder on the mast. The free lift cylinder is fitted with a restriction valve which prevents the load from falling in the case of a break in the hydraulics.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

1 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S7 Free lift cylinder

7340

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2. Dismantling • Remove the feeder pipe from the free lift cylinder • Plug the free lift cylinder • Loosen the screws holding the free lift cylinder on it’s upper side • Lift the inner guide with the help of a crane so that the double/triple hoses slacken • Remove the double/triple hoses from the hose reel on the free lift cylinder • Place blocks under the fork yoke • Lower the crane so that the fork yoke is resting on the blocks and the free lift chain slackens • Tie up the chains so that they cannot slide out of the upper chain wheels • Remove the inner cotter pin on the free lift chain cotter • Remove the free lift chain cotter • Remove the free lift chain from the free lift cylinder • Remove the chain stretcher from the free lift cylinder • Attach the cable to a crane • Remove the screws holding the free lift cylinder on it’s upper side • Lift the free lift cylinder down

2 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

2.1. Dismantling the cylinder • Place the lower stop (6) in a vice, allowing the upper part to rest against a yoke so that the cylinder is lying in a horizontal position • Tap the top sleeve (2) carefully with a rubber hammer. Heat may be carefully applied, if necessary • Unscrew the top sleeve (2) using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Carefully remove the piston rod from the cylinder making sure not to damage the thread. Place the piston rod on a clean soft surface • Knock out the top sleeve (2) with a rubber hammer

3. Dismantling the piston rod seal and ring • Force a screw driver into the seal (5) without marking the piston (3) in any way NOTE! If the piston is scratched at all it must be replaced to avoid leakage.

• Lift the piston rod seal (5) very carefully • Carefully cut away the piston rod seal (5) with a knife, making sure not to damage the piston (3) • Remove the ring (4)

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

3 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


7340

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

3.1. Assembling the piston rod seal and ring • Fit the ring (4) on the piston (3) • Fit the piston rod seal (5) on the piston (3) using tools 08-15418 and 08-15419

4. Dismantling the piston • Remove the piston rod seal (5) plus the ring (4) • Knock and, if necessary, heat the piston (3) • Unscrew the piston (3) using a pipe wrench 08-15393 • Brush away the old sealant

4.1. Assembling the piston in the free lift cylinder • Apply OMNI 230 to the thread • Screw the piston (3) in place using assembly tool 08-15390 • Be sure to wipe away all excess adhesive

4 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

5. Dismantling and assembling the restriction valve • Dismantle the restriction valve (7) using tool 08-15417 • Assemble the restriction valve (7) using tool 08-15417

6. Assembling the cylinder • Position the assembly sleeve 08-15365 on the cylinder • Place the piston rod in the cylinder • Remove the assembly sleeve • Fit the top sleeve (2) on the piston rod using a rubber hammer • Screw the top sleeve (2) to the cylinder a few turns • Apply sealant FD 1042 to the thread • Tighten using hook wrench 08-15391 NOTE! The drying time for the sealant is four hours, before which the cylinder must not be used.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

5 (6)

F-code

Section

C-code


7340

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,401-414

7. Assembly • Attach a cable to the free lift chain console at the free lift cylinder end plus a cable around the free lift cylinder (see illustration) • Lift the free lift cylinder to it’s correct position • Screw the free lift cylinder in place • Remove the crane • Fit the chain stretcher • Assemble the free lift chain and cotter • Fit the cotter pin • Untie the straps holding the free lift chain • Lift the inner guide using a crane • Assemble the double/triple hoses on the free lift cylinders hose reel • Remove the crane • Remove the plug from the free lift cylinder • Attach the feeder pipe to the free lift cylinder

6 (6)

Service Manual

1998-03-23

English

F-code

Section

RT

S9 9390 Position sensors

C-code

IIssued by

Approved by

Version no

T-code

Parts

H.Forsman

001

301-307,400-414

Position sensors Valid from serial number:

© BT Products AB

T-code

Model

Serial No

301


265200AA-

302


265200AA-

303


265200AA-

304


265200AA-

305


265200AA-

306


265200AA-

307


265200AA-

400

RR Cold store cabin

265200AA-

401

RR N1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

402

RR N1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

403

RR B1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

404

RR B1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

405

RR B5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

406

RR B5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

407

RR B7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

408

RR B7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

409

RR E1-3/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

410

RR E1-3C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

411

RR E5-6/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

412

RR E5-6C/15

301518AA-

AC/ACi

413

RR E7-8/15

301518AA-

ACi

414

RR E7-8C/15

301518AA-

ACi

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

Notes

1 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code

RT S9 Position sensors

9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

1. General This chapter deals with height indication and height selection. The height indication system consists of a tachometer which measures impulses on a wire and transmits them to the electronic card. The electronic card sends the signals to a display showing the height of the forks. The height selector receives impulses from the height indicator. The height selector can be programmed for the height at which the forks shall stop when collecting or depositing a load.

2. Height indication Trucks with high lifting heights are equipped with a height indicator which shows the current height of the forks within the main lifting zone. Character window (A) displays the fork height, based on information from the height meter.

2 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

3. Operation Measurement begins in the main lifting zone when reference switch (S45) is activated and sends a signal to the electronic card (A5). The pulse sensor (U10) sends pulses to A5 which starts by indicating the preprogrammed free lift height on the display (A8). The pulse transmitter has two channels, A and B, which give signals at 90° to each other. This give s information to A5 on whether the forks are up or down. For connecting, see chapter 5000 “Electrical diagrams”. For programming the free lift height, see chapter 5710 “Programming parameters”. The steel wire should be wound once around the measurement wheel and stretched so that it does not slip.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

3 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

4. Display The diagram shows the rear of the display for height indication and the table describes the or’s terminal number where I stands for Input.

4

5

3

Terminal Number

2

1

Connector

Function

2

I

RX (-) receives data

3

I

+ 48 V

4

I

Minus

5

I

RX (+) receives data

1

4 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

5. Preset height By using the preset height the operator can lift and lower the forks to a maximum of 99 different programmable levels within the main lifting zone. Based on height information obtained from the height meter, the lift and lowering mechanism is controlled to stop at the required level. Depositing or collecting the load takes place manually. The correct height for collecting or depositing the load is programmed via the keyboard. The selected level can be read from the display which also indicates any error codes.

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

5 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

6. Operation Measurement starts in the main lifting zone when the reference switch (S45) is activated and sends a signal to electronic card (A5). The pulse sensor (U10) sends pulses to A5 which starts by indicating the preprogrammed free lift height on displays (A7 and A8). The forks stop at the first preprogrammed height when A5, via the pulse sensor (U10) receives the right height. Stopping occurs through A5 controlling the speed of the pump motor with A2 and the valves for lifting/lowering the forks. The operator collects/deposits the load manually. When the operator once again presses the hydraulic control for lifting/lowering, the forks move to the next preprogrammed level. The pulse sensor has two channels, A and B, which give signals at 90° to each othe r. This gives information to A5 on whether the forks are moved up or down. For connection, see chapter 5000 Electrical diagrams. For programming the free lift height, see chapter 5710 Programming parameters. The steel wire should be wound once around the measurement wheel and stretched so that it does not slip.

6 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

7. Display The diagram shows the rear of the display for preset height and the table describes the or’s terminal number where I stands for Input and O stands for output. 6 5

7

4

3

2 1

Terminal Number

Connector

Function

1

O

TX (+) transmits data

3

I


4

I

+ 48V

5

O

TX (-) transmits data

6

I

Minus

7

I


2

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

7 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

7.1. Description of the display symbols Symbol

Function Numerical push-buttons for setting height levels

0 9 To control the required height level while driving

INFO STOP Deletes incorrectly entered height levels in automatic mode, stops programming and removes stops due to error Save “LEAVE level” when programming

Save “COLLECT level” when programming

LOAD Push-button to indicate that there is a load on the forks when starting

Push-button to access programming routines

PROG Display to indicate height levels and error codes

8 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

8. Assembly of height preset • Undo the 11 screws holding the lower in place and remove it • Remove the plastic plugs and remove the plastic console from the cavity for the height preset • Screw the height preset in place • Connect the or • Screw the lower back in place with the 11 screws

9. Programming Press the PROG button briefly to enter the programming mode. The LED in the button comes on and the display shows PL00 when the programming routine has been started. You can now program new lifting heights, modify or delete programmed values.

9.1. Programming a level Programming of lift heights can only take place within the main lifting zone. NOTE! Forks not horizontal. The load can slide off the forks or catch on the rack. When the load is deposited or collected the forks must always be horizontal.

9.1.1. Collection level • Enter programming mode and state the required level (e.g. 1+5= level 15). The numbers are shown on the display • Lift the forks to the required level and press the button COLLECT. The LED flashes 9.1.2. Leaving level • Pick up the load and wait three seconds. Lift the forks just enough so that the pallet can be removed from the rack. Ensure that there is sufficient space for safe handling • Now press the LEAVE button and both LEDs for collecting and leaving will start to flash • Press the PROG button until both LEDs go out and the display indicates PL00, to save the information • Repeat from “LEAVE “ level to program more levels • Press STOP to return to display mode © BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

9 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

9.2. Erasing programmed levels Lower the forks to the free lift zone when deleting lifting heights. • Enter the programming mode and state the required level (e.g. 1+5= level 15). The numbers are shown on the display • Press the COLLECT button (the LED flashes) and then press the LEAVE button (both LEDs start to flash) • Press the PROG button until both LEDs (COLLECT and LEAVE) stop flashing and the display shows PL00 to erase the memory • Press the STOP button to return to the display mode

10. Automatic operations There are two different automatic operating modes. One where the forks are raised/lowered to the required level without a load and the other, with a load. 10.0.1. Collect load • State the required height level using buttons 0-9, (e.g. 1+2= level 12). The display will show LE12 • Raise/lower the forks until they are automatically stopped by the electronics. If the wrong direction is chosen no “raise/lower movement” will take place. The electronics expect the correct direction to be selected • When the forks stop and the LED, COLLECT comes on, the forks can be manoeuvred under the load NOTE! Forks not horizontal. The load can slide off the forks or catch on the rack. When the load is deposited or collected the forks must always be horizontal.

• Raise the forks until they are automatically stopped by the electronics and the LED, LEAVE, comes on • Move the load from the rack. When the work cycle has been completed the LEDs will go out

10 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

10.0.2. Leaving a load • Press the load button (the LED now comes on) • State the required height level using buttons 0-9, (e.g. 5=level 5. The display will show LE05) • Raise/lower the forks until they are automatically stopped by the electronics. If the wrong direction is chosen no “raise/lower movement” will take place. The electronics expect the correct direction to be selected • When the forks stop and the LED, LEAVE comes on, the forks can be slid out from under the load NOTE! Forks not horizontal. The load can slide off the forks or catch on the rack. When the load is deposited or collected the forks must always be horizontal.

• Lower the forks until they are automatically stopped by the electronics and the LED, COLLECT comes on • Remove the forks from the rack. When the work cycle has been completed the LEDs will go out 10.0.3. Control • Press the button INFO to check the required “collect/leave level”. The value will be shown for three seconds on the display

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

11 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

11. Parameters There are a number of parameters that can be modified in the preset height program. • Press the button PROG for three seconds to start programming routines. The LED comes on and the display shows P_ _ _ • Enter code 852 using the numerical keys and the display will now show P_ • State the required parameter 1-9 and then press the LOAD button. The display shows the factory settings. These can be changed to any of the max/min. values shown in the table “Programming parameters” NOTE! If a value outside the max/min. range is programmed in, this will be replaced by the max/min. factory setting.

• Press the STOP button to complete programming

P1 Select the unit of measurement you wish to use (metres or inches). Press the PROG button to save the unit you selected. The display shows P_

P2 If the distance between lifting heights is equal on all levels, you can make a common program: • State parameter 2 and press the LOAD button. The display shows P 00 and you now enter the number of levels. Press the LOAD button and the display shows P000 • Enter the “collect height” for the first level, in steps of 10 mm. Press the LOAD button, the display shows P000 • The next value to be entered is the distance between the collect and leave levels, in steps of 10 mm. Press the LOAD button, the display shows P000 • The last value to be entered is the distance between each level in steps of 10 mm. Press the PROG button to save the programmed values. The display shows P_

12 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

P3 Programming the crawling speed for braking distances: • State parameter 3 and press the LOAD button. The display shows the previously programmed value for the crawling speed lower. Enter the new value using the numerical keys. The permitted max/min. values are shown in the table “Programming parameters” • Press the LOAD button to change the crawling speed lift. The display shows the value for the crawling speed. Enter the new value using the numerical keys • Press the PROG button to save the new values. The display shows P_

P4 Programming the crawling distance when lifting and lowering. • State parameter 4 and press LOAD button. The display shows the previous value for crawling distance lower. Enter the new value using the numerical keys. The permitted max/min. values are shown in table “Programming parameters” • Press the LOAD button to change the crawling distance lift. The display shows the value for the crawling distance. Enter the new value using the numerical keys • Press the PROG button to save the new values. The display shows P_

P5 Programming the tolerance for the “stop levels”. • State parameter 5 and press LOAD button. The display shows the previous value for tolerance. Enter the new value using the numerical keys. The permitted max/min. values are shown in table “Programming parameters” • Press the PROG button to save the new values. The display shows P_

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

13 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

P7 Programming the largest and smallest permitted programming distance between the levels collect and leave. • State parameter 7. The display shows the previously programmed value for the minimum distance. Enter the new value using the numerical keys, (e.g. 030 = 30 mm). The permitted max/min. values are shown in table “Programming parameters” • Press the LOAD button. The display shows the previously programmed value for the maximum distance. Enter the new value using the numerical keys (e.g. 150 = 150 mm) • Press the PROG button to save the new values. The display shows P_

P8 Reset all the parameters to the factory settings. NOTE! Reset all factory settings after upgrading to a new program version.

• State parameter 8 and press the LOAD button. The display shows no value • Press the PROG button until the display stops showing PP. Turn the ignition key on and off to start the new program

P9 • Programming the “leave/collect level’s” braking distance • State parameter 9 and press the LOAD button. The display shows the braking distance for lower. Enter the new value using the numerical keys, (e.g. 050 = 500 mm) • Press the LOAD button. The display shows the braking distance for lift • Enter the new value using the numerical keys, (e.g. 030 = 300 mm) • Press the PROG button to save. The display shows P_

14 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

12. Programming parameters Parameter Number

Max/min value

P1

001 002

Factory value

Unit

Function

m - 10 mm inch - 10ths of an inch

Unit of measurement

P2 1 - 99 0 - 999 0 - 255 0 - 999

10 mm 10 mm 10 mm

P3 0 - 127 0 - 127

Programming of several levels at equal collect/leave distances. Number of levels Distance first “ collect level” Distance collect-leave Distance between “leave levels”

030 010

P4

% of max speed

Crawling speed before stop Lower Lift

mm

Crawling speed before stop Lower Lift

010 005 P5

0 - 255

010

mm

Permitted error tolerance in stop position

P7

0 - 255 0 - 255

030 150

mm

Min/max distance between leave/ collect

P8

Resetting of all values to factory settings

P9

Braking distance before stop Lower Lift

0 - 255 0 - 255

© BT Products AB

050 030

Service Manual

10 mm 10 mm

1998-01-19

English

15 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

Position

Function

A

Leave level

B

Collect level

C

Main lifting zone

H2

Free lifting zone

C

P3 P9

A P5

P7

B P3 P9

16 (18)

H2

P5

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

F-code

Section

RT


C-code

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

13. Error codes Error code

Remarks

Err 1

Requested height level not programmed or incorrect

Err 2

Forks have stopped outside the tolerance zone (P5)

Err 9

Incorrect value entered when programming

Err flashing

Fault in communication between height preset and truck computer

• Cztery linie appear first. This shows that there has been no communication between the height preset and the main electronics. The lines will disappear when communication is restored between the units • Four dots appear on the display when the forks are in the free lift zone • If the dots are flashing it is an indication that the reference switch was activated when the truck was started (e.g. the forks were above the free lift zone). If the dots continue to flash after the forks have been lowered a fault may have occurred in the wiring harness or the height reference switch

© BT Products AB

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

17 (18)

F-code

Section

C-code


9390

Version no

T-code

001

301-307,400-414

18 (18)

Service Manual

1998-01-19

English

Bt Rr 2b6g5j

Overview 26281t

More details 6y5l6z

Related Documents 3h463d

Bt Rr 2b6g5j

Bt 2r6717

Bt Lpe200 3v262z

Rr Dibujos 525f22

Rr- Hcg 4b3u5m

Estudio Rr h1l3t